<?xml version="1.0" encoding="windows-1252"?><SEC xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation="http://si.ksc.nasa.gov/sidownloads/xml/specsintactSEC.xsd"><MTA NAME="SUBFORMAT" CONTENT="NEW"/><BRK/>
<HDR><AST/><BRK/>
USACE / NAVFAC / AFCESA / NASA          UFGS-33 60 00.00 10 (April 2008)<BRK/>
                                        --------------------------------<BRK/>
Preparing Activity:  <PRA>USACE</PRA>              Superseding<BRK/>
                                        UFGS-33 60 00.00 10 (January 2008)<BRK/>
<BRK/>
<HL4>UNIFIED FACILITIES GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS</HL4><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<HL4>References are in agreement with UMRL dated January 2009</HL4><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></HDR>
<BRK/>
<SCN>SECTION 33 60 00.00 10</SCN><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<STL>CENTRAL HIGH TEMPERATURE WATER (HTW) GENERATING PLANT AND AUXILIARIES</STL><BRK/>
<DTE>04/08</DTE><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  This guide specification covers the requirements for <SCP>high temperature 
water plants of capacities over 2,930 kW (10,000,000 Btuh), producing water 
at temperatures of 115 to 227 degrees C (240 to 440 degrees F) at pressures 
up to 2.8 MPa (400 psig)</SCP>.<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Edit this guide specification for project specific requirements by adding, deleting, 
or revising text.  For bracketed items, choose applicable items(s) or insert 
appropriate information.<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Remove information and requirements not required in respective project, whether 
or not brackets are present.<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Comments and suggestions on this guide specification are welcome and should 
be directed to the technical proponent of the specification.  A listing of <URL HREF="http://65.204.17.188/report/ufgs.html">technical 
proponents</URL>, including their organization designation and telephone number, is 
on the Internet.<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Recommended changes to a UFGS should be submitted as a  <URL HREF="http://65.204.17.188/projnet/cms/public.html">Criteria Change Request 
(CCR)</URL>.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<PRT><TTL>PART 1   GENERAL</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>1.1   REFERENCES</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  This paragraph is used to list the publications cited in the text of 
the guide specification.  The publications are referred to in the text by basic 
designation only and listed in this paragraph by organization, designation, 
date, and title.<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Use the Reference Wizard's Check Reference feature when you add a RID outside 
of the Section's Reference Article to automatically place the reference in the 
Reference Article.  Also use the Reference Wizard's Check Reference feature 
to update the issue dates.<BRK/>
<BRK/>
References not used in the text will automatically be deleted from this section 
of the project specification when you choose to reconcile references in the 
publish print process.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.  The publications are 
referred to within the text by the basic designation only.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<REF><ORG>AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>AMCA 801</RID><RTL>(2001) Industrial Process/Power Generation Fans:  Specification Guidelines</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ABMA 11</RID><RTL>(1990; R 1999) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ABMA 9</RID><RTL>(1990; R 2000) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>AMERICAN BOILER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ABMA Boiler 203</RID><RTL>(2002) A Guide to Clean and Efficient Operation of Coal-Stoker-Fired Boilers</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>AMERICAN GAS ASSOCIATION (AGA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>AGA XR0603</RID><RTL>(2006) AGA Plastic Pipe Manual for Gas Service</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>AMERICAN GEAR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AGMA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>AGMA 6013</RID><RTL>(2006) Standard for Industrial Enclosed Gear Drives</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>AGMA 6113</RID><RTL>(2006) Standard for Industrial Enclosed Gear Drives (Metric Edition)</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>API Std 610</RID><RTL>(2004) Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Petrochemical, and Natural Gas Industries</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING AND MAINTENANCE-OF-WAY ASSOCIATION (AREMA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>AREMA Eng Man</RID><RTL>(2008) Manual for Railway Engineering</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>AWWA C203</RID><RTL>(2002) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot-Applied</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>AWWA C213</RID><RTL>(2007) Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME B1.20.1</RID><RTL>(1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME B16.11</RID><RTL>(2005) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME B16.18</RID><RTL>(2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME B16.21</RID><RTL>(2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME B16.26</RID><RTL>(2006) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME B16.3</RID><RTL>(2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME B16.34</RID><RTL>(2004) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME B16.39</RID><RTL>(1998; R 2006) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME B16.5</RID><RTL>(2003) Standard for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings:  NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME B16.9</RID><RTL>(2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME B19.3</RID><RTL>(1991; Addenda A 1994; Addenda B 1995) Safety Standard for Compressors for Process Industries</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME B31.1</RID><RTL>(2007; Addenda 2008) Power Piping</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME BPVC SEC I</RID><RTL>(2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section I, Power Boilers</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME BPVC SEC IX</RID><RTL>(2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME BPVC SEC VII</RID><RTL>(2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section VII, Recommended Guidelines for the Care of Power Boilers</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1</RID><RTL>(2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section VIII, Pressure Vessels Division 1 - Basic Coverage</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME CSD-1</RID><RTL>(2006) Control and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME PTC 10</RID><RTL>(1997; R 2003) Performance Test Code on Compressors and Exhausters</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASME PTC 4</RID><RTL>(1998) Fired Steam Generators</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM A 106/A 106M</RID><RTL>(2008) Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM A 167</RID><RTL>(1999; R 2004) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM A 242/A 242M</RID><RTL>(2004e1) Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM A 36/A 36M</RID><RTL>(2008) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM A 514/A 514M</RID><RTL>(2005) Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID><RTL>(2007) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM A 568/A 568M</RID><RTL>(2007a) Standard Specifications for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM A 653/A 653M</RID><RTL>(2008) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM A 733</RID><RTL>(2003) Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM B 68</RID><RTL>(2002) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright Annealed</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM B 68M</RID><RTL>(1999; R 2005) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright Annealed (Metric)</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM B 88</RID><RTL>(2003) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM B 88M</RID><RTL>(2005) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric)</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM C 155</RID><RTL>(1997; R 2007) Standard Specification for Insulating Firebrick</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM C 27</RID><RTL>(1998; R 2008) Fireclay and High-Alumina Refractory Brick</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM C 34</RID><RTL>(2003) Structural Clay Load-Bearing Wall Tile</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM C 401</RID><RTL>(1991; R 2005) Alumina and Alumina-Silicate Castable Refractories</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM C 62</RID><RTL>(2008) Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM D 396</RID><RTL>(2008b) Standard Specification for Fuel Oils</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>ASTM G 21</RID><RTL>(1996; R 2002) Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>CONVEYOR EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (CEMA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>CEMA B105.1</RID><RTL>(2003) Welded Steel Conveyor Pulleys with Compression Type Hubs</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>CEMA Belt Book</RID><RTL>(2005) Belt Conveyors for Bulk Materials</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>CSA AMERICA, INC. (CSA/AM)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>CSA/AM Z21.22</RID><RTL>(1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R 2004) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>CSA/AM Z83.19</RID><RTL>(2001; R 2005; Addenda 2007) Gas-Fired Infrared Heaters</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>EXPANSION JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (EJMA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>EJMA Stds</RID><RTL>(2003) EJMA Standards</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>IEEE C37.90</RID><RTL>(2005) Standard for Relays and Relay Systems Associated With Electric Power Apparatus</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>MSS SP-58</RID><RTL>(2002) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>MSS SP-69</RID><RTL>(2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>MSS SP-70</RID><RTL>(2006) Standard for Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>MSS SP-71</RID><RTL>(2005) Standard for Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>MSS SP-80</RID><RTL>(2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>MSS SP-85</RID><RTL>(2002) Standard for Cast Iron Globe &amp; Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>NACE SP0185</RID><RTL>(2007) Extruded, Polyolefin Resin Coating Systems with Soft Adhesives for Underground or Submerged Pipe</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>NEMA ICS 1</RID><RTL>(2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>NEMA MG 1</RID><RTL>(2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and Generators</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>NFPA 70</RID><RTL>(2007; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code - 2008 Edition</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>NFPA 85</RID><RTL>(2007) Boiler and Combustion Systems Hazards Code</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>NIST HB 44</RID><RTL>(2007) NIST Handbook 44:  Specifications, Tolerances, and other Technical Requirements for Weighing and Measuring Devices</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>RUBBER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (RMA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>RMA IP-1</RID><RTL>(1989) Conveyor and Elevator Belt Handbook</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>SSPC Paint 16</RID><RTL>(2006) Paint Specification No. 16 Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide Black (or Dark Red) Paint</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>SSPC SP 6</RID><RTL>(7) Commercial Blast Cleaning</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>TUBULAR EXCHANGER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (TEMA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>TEMA Stds</RID><RTL>(2007) Standards of the Tubular Exchange Manufacturers Association (TEMA)</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>30 CFR 1</RID><RTL>Mine Safety and Health Administration; Establishment and Use of Official Emblem</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF><REF><ORG>UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)</ORG><BRK/><BRK/><RID>UL 296</RID><RTL>(2003; Rev thru Feb 2006) Oil Burners</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>UL 726</RID><RTL>(1995; Rev thru Mar 2006) Oil-Fired Boiler Assemblies</RTL><BRK/><BRK/><RID>UL 795</RID><RTL>(2006) Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating Equipment</RTL><BRK/><BRK/></REF></SPT><SPT><TTL>1.2   SUBMITTALS</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Review submittal description (SD) definitions in Section <SRF>01 33 00</SRF> SUBMITTAL 
PROCEDURES and edit the following list to reflect only the submittals required 
for the project.  Submittals should be kept to the minimum required for adequate 
quality control.<BRK/>
<BRK/>
A “G” following a submittal item indicates that the submittal requires Government 
approval.  Some submittals are already marked with a “G”.  Only delete an existing 
“G” if the submittal item is not complex and can be reviewed through the Contractor’s 
Quality Control system.  Only add a “G” if the submittal is sufficiently important 
or complex in context of the project.<BRK/>
<BRK/>
For submittals requiring Government approval on Army projects, a code of up 
to three characters within the submittal tags may be used following the "G" 
designation to indicate the approving authority.  Codes for Army projects using 
the Resident Management System (RMS) are:  "AE" for Architect-Engineer; "DO" 
for District Office (Engineering Division or other organization in the District 
Office); "AO" for Area Office; "RO" for Resident Office; and "PO" for Project 
Office.  Codes following the "G" typically are not used for Navy, Air Force, 
and NASA projects.<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Choose the first bracketed item for Navy, Air Force and NASA projects, or choose 
the second bracketed item for Army projects.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation 
are for [Contractor Quality Control approval.] [information only.  When used, a designation following the "G" 
designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.]  Submit the following in 
accordance with Section <SRF>01 33 00</SRF> SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST><SUB>SD-02 Shop Drawings</SUB></LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM><SUB>High Temperature Water Generators</SUB></ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>  Detail drawings consisting of schedules, performance charts, brochures, diagrams, drawings, 
and instructions necessary for installation of the HTW generating units and associated equipment, 
and for piping, wiring, devices, trenches, and related foundations.  Complete setting plans 
certified by the HTW generator and burner manufacturers.  Detail drawings for HTW generators 
and appurtenances, including coal and ash handling equipment.  Drawings shall indicate clearances 
required for maintenance and operation and shall contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams, 
equipment layout and anchorage, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system 
has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit.  Detailed drawings of pipe anchors, 
before installation.  Manufacturer's written instructions indicating optimum pressure at all 
manometer connectors shall be included.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST><SUB>SD-03 Product Data</SUB></LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM><SUB>Calculations</SUB></ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>  Manufacturer's design data and structural computations, as specified.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM><SUB>Spare Parts</SUB></ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>  Spare parts data for each item of equipment provided, as specified.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM><SUB>Manufacturer's Instructions</SUB></ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>  Proposed diagrams, instructions, and other sheets, before posting.  Framed instructions under 
glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout 
of the entire system, shall be posted where directed.  Condensed operating instructions explaining 
preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, 
and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, 
framed as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams, and posted beside the diagrams.  
The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM><SUB>Tests</SUB></ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>  Test procedure, as specified.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM><SUB>Welding Qualifications</SUB></ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>  A copy of qualified welding procedures and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified 
welders and welding operators.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM><SUB>Field Training</SUB></ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>  Proposed schedule for field training, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related training.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST><SUB>SD-06 Test Reports</SUB></LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM><SUB>Tests</SUB></ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>  Test reports shall be submitted in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust 
each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance 
criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system.  Each test report shall indicate 
the final position of controls.  The action settings for all automatic controls in the form 
of a typed, tabulated list indicating the type of control, location setting, and function shall 
be included.  A written statement from the manufacturer's representative certifying that combustion 
control equipment has been properly installed and is in proper operating condition, upon completion 
of the installation.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST><SUB>SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data</SUB></LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM><SUB>Operating and Maintenance Instructions</SUB></ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>  Operating instructions, prior to the field training course.  [Six] [_____] copies of operating 
instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and 
shutdown.  The instructions shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, 
parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features.  Maintenance 
instructions, prior to the field training course. [Six] [_____] complete copies of maintenance 
instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting 
guides.  The instructions shall include piping layout, equipment layout, and simplified wiring 
and control diagrams of the system as installed.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>1.3   QUALITY ASSURANCE</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>1.3.1   <SUB>Welding Qualifications</SUB></TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where pipeline, structural, or other welding is required on the same 
project, tests will be required accordingly.  Testing may be by the coupon method 
as prescribed in the welding code or by special radiographic methods.  If the 
need exists for more stringent requirements for weldments, delete the first 
bracketed statement and the welding submittal.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>[Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using performance qualified welders and welding 
operators.  Procedures and welders shall be qualified in accordance with <RID>ASME BPVC SEC IX</RID>.  Welding procedures 
qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer may be accepted as permitted 
by <RID>ASME B31.1</RID>.  The Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of tests and the tests shall be 
performed at the work site if practicable.  The welder or welding operator shall apply his assigned symbol near 
each weld he makes as a permanent record.  Structural members shall be welded in accordance with Section 
<SRF>05 05 23</SRF> WELDING, STRUCTURAL.]  [Welding and nondestructive testing procedures are specified in Section 
<SRF>43 02 00</SRF> WELDING PRESSURE PIPING.]</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>1.3.2   <SUB>Calculations</SUB></TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The Contractor shall submit calculations for walls, roof, foundations, and other features for specialty type 
of construction, along with design data for lateral forces that may be encountered due to wind loads and seismic 
forces</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>1.4   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and 
temperature variation, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>1.5   EXTRA MATERIALS</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The Contractor shall submit <SUB>spare parts</SUB> data for each different item of equipment specified, after approval of 
the drawings and not later than [_____] months before the date of beneficial occupancy.  The data shall include 
a complete list of spare parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of the 
parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after [1] [and] [3] year[s] of service</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</PRT><PRT><TTL>PART 2   PRODUCTS</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.1   MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.1.1   Standard Products</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Porvide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture 
of the products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years 
prior to bid opening.  Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the 
Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the site.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.1.2   Nameplates</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Secure to each major item of equipment a plate with the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or 
serial number, and catalog number.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.1.3   Prevention of Rust</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Unless otherwise specified, surfaces of ferrous metal subject to corrosion shall be factory prime painted with 
a rust inhibiting coating and subsequently factory finish painted in accordance with the manufacturer's standard 
practice.  Equipment exposed to high temperature when in service shall be prime and finish painted with the manufacturer's 
standard heat resistant paint to a minimum thickness of<MET> 0.025 mm</MET><ENG> 1 mil</ENG>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.1.4   Equipment Guards and Access</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Fully enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating 
parts exposed to personnel contact.  High temperature equipment and piping exposed to contact by personnel or 
where it creates a fire hazard shall be properly guarded or covered with insulation of a type specified.  Provide 
items such as catwalks, operating platforms, ladders, and guardrails where shown, and constructed in accordance 
with Section [<SRF>05 50 13</SRF> MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS][<SRF>05 51 33</SRF> METAL LADDERS].</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.1.5   Use of Asbestos Products</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  The first clause in brackets should be used when it is known that substitutes 
are available for any asbestos products which might be included with the equipment.  
The second clause in brackets should be used when it is possible or definitely 
known that asbestos products for which no technically acceptable substitute 
exists may be included with the equipment.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>[Products which contain asbestos are prohibited.  This prohibition includes items such as packings or gaskets, 
even though the item is encapsulated or the asbestos fibers are impregnated with binder material.]  [Except as 
provided below, products which contain asbestos are prohibited.  This prohibition includes items such as packings 
and gaskets, even though the item is encapsulated or the asbestos fibers are impregnated with binder material.  
Asbestos products are acceptable only in exceptional cases where the Contractor states in writing that no suitable 
substitute material exists, and, in addition, the Contractor furnishes to the Contracting Officer a copy of U.S. 
Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration "Material Safety Sheet" (Form OSHA-20), completed 
by the asbestos manufacturer, stating that the product is not an asbestos health hazard.]</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.2   <SUB>HIGH TEMPERATURE WATER GENERATORS</SUB></TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Each HTW generator (boiler) shall have the capacity indicated when operating with [_____]<MET> degrees C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG>
 entering water temperature and [_____]<MET> degrees C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG> outlet temperature with a water flow of [_____]<MET> kg/second</MET><ENG>
 pounds/hour</ENG>.  The HTW generators shall be designed for a maximum allowable working pressure of [_____]<MET> kPa</MET><ENG> psig</ENG>
 at [_____]<MET> degrees C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG>.  The equipment design and accessory locations shall permit accessibility for 
maintenance and service.  Design conditions shall be as follows:</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Site elevation, [_____]<MET> m</MET><ENG> feet</ENG>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Ambient air temperatures, [_____]<MET> degrees C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG> to [_____]<MET> degrees C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Reference air temperature, <MET>27 degrees C</MET><ENG> 80 degrees F</ENG>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The HTW generators shall be capable of operating continuously at maximum specified capacity without damage or 
deterioration to the generator, its setting, or firing equipment or auxiliaries.  The generator shall be operable 
automatically while burning the fuel specified.  The HTW generators shall operate on [coal meeting the requirement 
of paragraph FUEL BURNING EQUIPMENT][fuel oil conforming to grade number of <RID>ASTM D 396</RID>][a combination of coal 
and fuel oil conforming to <RID>ASTM D 396</RID>].</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.1   Capacity</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Rated capacity shall be the capacity at which the HTW generators will operate continuously without exceeding 
the furnace heat release, volumetric and radiant, furnace exit temperature, and gas exit temperature specified.  
Generator auxiliaries including fans, motors, drives, and similar equipment shall be provided with at least 10 
percent excess capacity to allow for field variations in settings and to compensate for any unforeseen increases 
in pressure losses in appurtenant piping and ductwork.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.2   Electrical Equipment</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Electric motor-driven equipment shall be provided complete with motors and necessary motor control devices.  
Motors and motor control devices shall be as specified in Section <SRF>26 20 00</SRF> INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM including 
requirements for hazardous area locations.  Motors shall have electrical characteristics and enclosure type as 
shown.  Integral size motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with <RID>NEMA MG 1</RID>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.2.1   Motor Ratings</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Motors shall be suitable for the voltage and frequency provided.  Motors<MET> 373 W</MET><ENG> l/2 horsepower</ENG> and larger shall 
be three phase, unless otherwise indicated.  Ratings shall be adequate for the duty imposed, but shall not be 
less than indicated.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.2.2   Motor Starters</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where motor starters for mechanical equipment are provided in motor control 
centers, delete the description of motor starters.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Where a motor starter is not indicated in a motor control center on the electrical drawings, a motor starter 
shall be provided under this section of the specifications.  Motor starters shall be provided complete with properly 
sized thermal overload protection and other equipment at the specified capacity including an allowable service 
factor, and other appurtenances necessary.  Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required 
for the operation specified, and any wiring required to such devices, shall be provided whether indicated or 
not.  Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state variable-speed controllers may be provided 
to accomplish the same function.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.2.3   Heating Plant Requirements</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The plant shall include [package type][field-erected type], [coal-][fuel oil-][combination coal/fuel oil-] fired, 
controlled circulation, HTW generators; expansion vessels; nitrogen pressurization system; makeup water equipment; 
fuel systems; pumps; and all controls, piping, insulation, miscellaneous plant equipment and other accessories 
indicated or necessary to provide a complete and operable system.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.4   HTW Generator Design Requirements</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.4.1   Radiant Heat Input</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The radiant heat input for the effective radiant heating surface of controlled circulation watertube HTW generators 
shall be limited to a maximum of<MET> 394 kW/square meter</MET><ENG> 125,000 Btuh/square foot</ENG>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.4.2   Maximum Heat Input</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The maximum heat input per<MET> cubic meter</MET><ENG> cubic foot</ENG> of furnace volume shall be limited to<MET> 931 MJ/cubic meter</MET><ENG> 25,000 
Btu/cubic foot</ENG> with spreader stokers and watertube boilers and<MET> 1,677 MJ/cubic meter</MET><ENG> 45,000 Btuh/cubic foot</ENG> with 
underfeed stokers.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.4.3   Combustion Gas Temperature</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The combustion gas temperature at the furnace exit shall be a [minimum of<MET> 56 degrees C</MET><ENG> 100 degrees F</ENG> less than 
the ash fusion softening temperature (reducing atmosphere) of the coal specified] [or] [maximum of<MET> 1150 degrees 
C</MET><ENG> 2100 degrees F</ENG> when furnace is oil-fired].</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.4.4   Design Requirements</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The HTW generator shall be of the controlled, forced-circulation, watertube, once-through type designed and constructed 
for high temperature water service, and shall be so certified by the manufacturer.  Except as modified, the design 
shall conform to the applicable construction and performance requirements of <RID>ASME BPVC SEC I</RID> and <RID>ASME BPVC SEC VII</RID>
 with the following additional requirements:</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  The water pressure drop through the generator shall not exceed<MET> 105 kPa</MET><ENG> 15 psi</ENG> based on a water temperature 
differential of<MET> 83 degrees C</MET><ENG> 150 degrees F</ENG>, generator inlet to outlet.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  The generator shall not have steam space or other spaces where steam can be trapped.  Headers shall 
be vented at high points as required.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Tubes and headers located in any radiant heat transfer zone shall be designed for horizontal flow 
or upflow of water.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>d.  Tubes and headers located outside the primary radiant heat transfer zones may be designed for downflow 
of water.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>e.  The generator shall be designed for equalization of water flow through the tube circuits.  Radiant 
and convective heating surfaces shall be arranged for series water flow to insure uniform flow distribution 
and temperature rise.  Flow shall be proportioned to the heat input to prevent formation of steam in 
any tubes or headers to the extent that flow distribution becomes unbalanced.  Distribution of flow may 
be controlled by limiting the number of flow paths in parallel, or by using restrictors (orifices), when 
required, in each group of parallel flow paths to increase pressure drop and to insure that all groups 
have the same pressure drop.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.4.5   Spreader Stoker Units</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Spreader stoker units with continuous or intermittent automatic mechanical ash discharge grates shall have a 
maximum loading of<MET> 2206 kW/square meter</MET><ENG> 700,000 Btuh/square foot</ENG> of grate area.  The traveling grate type shall 
have a maximum loading of<MET> 1,419 kW/square meter</MET><ENG> 450,000 Btuh/square foot</ENG> of grate area.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.4.6   Underfeed Dumping Grate Units</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Underfeed dumping grate units shall have a maximum loading per<MET> square meter</MET><ENG> square foot</ENG> of grate of<MET> 1,419 kW</MET><ENG> 
450,000 Btuh</ENG>, assuming a 10 percent maximum ash content and<MET> 1200 degrees C</MET><ENG> 2200 degrees F</ENG> minimum ash softening 
temperature.  The area shall not include side dumping areas.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.4.7   Effective Radiant Heating Surface</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Effective radiant heating surface is defined as the heat exchange surface within the furnace boundaries which 
is directly exposed to radiant heat of the flame on one side and to the medium being heated on the other.  This 
surface includes plain or finned tubes and headers and plain surfaces which may be bare, metal covered, or metallic 
core covered.  Refractory lined surfaces shall not be counted.  The surface shall be measured on the side receiving 
heat.  Computations of effective radiant heating surfaces shall be based on the following:</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Bare, metal covered, or metallic core covered tubes and headers - the projected area, external diameter 
times length, of the tube or header.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Extended surfaces, metal and metallic surfaces extending from the tubes or headers - 80 percent of 
the flat projected area, except metal blocks not integral with tubes or headers; extended surfaces less 
than<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> thick or more than<MET> 32 mm</MET><ENG> 1-1/4 inches</ENG> long; that portion of the extended surface 
which is more than one tube or header radius from the tube or header from which it extends, are not included.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Furnace exit tubes - the projected area of those portions of the first two rows of exit tubes receiving 
radiant heat from the fire.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.4.8   Furnace Volume</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Furnace volume is defined as the cubical volume between the top of the grate and the first plane of entry into, 
or between, the tubes.  If screen tubes are utilized, they constitute the plane of entry.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.4.9   Burners</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Burners shall conform to requirements of <RID>NFPA 85</RID>, <RID>UL 296</RID>, and <RID>UL 726</RID>, except as otherwise specified.  Flame safeguard 
controls shall be equipped with repetitive self-checking circuits.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.4.10   Generator</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The HTW generator shall have the continuous capacity within the specified range at the specified pressure with 
boiler feed water at approximately [_____]<MET> degrees C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG>.  The flue gas outlet temperature shall be [_____]<MET>
 degrees C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG>, based on excess air of [_____] percent and carbon loss of [_____] percent, at all loads 
above 50 percent of maximum continuous capacity.  Output capacity shall be based on tests of the HTW generator 
[and burner] as a unit.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.2.4.11   Nameplates</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Each HTW generator shall have nameplates stamped with:</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Maximum continuous capacity in<MET> Watts</MET><ENG> Btuh</ENG>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Radiant heating surface in<MET> square meters</MET><ENG> sq. ft</ENG>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Total heating surface in<MET> square meters</MET><ENG> sq. ft</ENG>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>d.  Design pressure in<MET> Pa</MET><ENG> psig</ENG>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT></SPT><SPT><TTL>2.3   HIGH TEMPERATURE WATER GENERATOR DETAILS</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.1   HTW Generators and Components</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>HTW generators shall be [site assembled] [shop assembled] type and arranged to suit firing equipment as specified.  
The HTW generators shall be designed for continuous operation at the capacity indicated.  Unit shall be designed 
to burn [fuel oil specified] [and] [coal of size and analysis specified].  Watertube, waterwall type HTW generating 
units shall be furnished complete with [oil burners] [and] [stokers for coal firing], forced and induced draft 
fans, control and instrument panel with limit and automatic controls, soot blowers, [over fire air system,] feedwater 
regulator, low water flow cutoff and alarm, feed piping, and all other fittings, auxiliaries, and appurtenances 
necessary for safe and efficient operation.  Firing equipment and boiler shall be matched and adjusted in accordance 
with the boiler manufacturer's requirements.  [The HTW generator shall be factory-fabricated and assembled on 
a steel foundation or foundations, or shipped in not more than three complete subunits to minimize field erection.]  
Combustion controls shall be provided.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.1.1   Headers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Boiler shall be header-and-tube construction with header diameter limited to accommodate the water flow and required 
distribution with a reasonable pressure drop.  The use of drums or excessive header sizes will not be acceptable.  
Headers shall be seamless steel <RID>ASTM A 106/A 106M</RID>, Grade B.  Headers shall not be located in primary radiant 
furnace section.  Bottom portion of header at tube connection shall not be insulated.  Method of tube attachment 
to headers shall be by strength welding or by rolling, seal welding, and rerolling in accordance with <RID>ASME BPVC SEC I</RID>
.  Rolling of tubes into headers only is not acceptable.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.1.2   Tubes</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Tubes shall be electric welded or seamless steel.  Boilers shall have water-cooled furnace walls of a design 
suitable for the application.  Tubes located in the primary furnace shall be designed for horizontal or upflow 
of water.  The water shall be distributed to the heating surface in proportion to the heat absorbing capacities 
of these surfaces.  Tube heat absorbing surfaces shall be located so that radiant and convection sections provide 
for series flow of water, from generator inlet to outlet, to ensure uniform water distribution and uniform temperature 
rise from inlet to outlet.  Where required, flow orifices shall be provided.  Each orifice shall be protected 
from clogging by individual strainers or by the master strainer located in the HTW generator return line.  If 
individual strainers are utilized, individual access openings for each strainer shall be provided.  Access plugs, 
if used, shall be of the shoulder type with machined surface.  The individual access openings shall be provided 
with stainless steel filled gaskets.  All header gasket surfaces shall be machined to provide proper seating 
of gasket.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.1.3   Baffles</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Baffles shall be arranged to bring the products of combustion into contact with the heating surfaces.  Baffles 
shall be either water-cooled or a refractory material or metal suitable for temperatures encountered.  Steel 
plate or refractory baffles, if used, shall be provided with water cooling on the radiant heat (furnace) side.  
The generator's convection section shall have counterflow, water-to-gas, to provide an integral economizer arrangement 
for optimum heat absorption, gas-to-water.  Draft loss shall be held to a minimum.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.1.4   Furnace</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Furnace shall be water-cooled and the combustion space shall be provided with water cooling on sidewalls, rear 
wall, roof, and front, except the portion of the front wall section required for [stoker installation] [and] 
[burner installation].  For stoker-fired generators, furnace side walls and rear wall shall be water-cooled by 
vertical tubes with center-to-center spacing not to exceed twice the tube diameter, and shall be furnished with 
cast-iron, water-cooled armor block at the grate line to a height of not less than<MET> 380 mm</MET><ENG> 15 inches</ENG> above the 
grate line.  The armor block shall be keyed and held in place without the use of bolts, pins, or mastic.  The 
armor block shall be readily replaceable without the use of special tools.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.1.5   Supports</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>HTW generators and firing equipment shall be supported from the foundations with structural steel independent 
of all brickwork.  HTW generator supports shall permit free expansion and contraction of each portion of the 
HTW generator without placing undue stress on any part of the HTW generator or setting.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.1.6   Access Doors</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Access doors in sufficient number, of adequate size, and properly located shall be provided for cleaning, inspection, 
and repair of all areas in the complete assembly.  Doors shall be gas-tight, and interior surfaces exposed to 
direct radiation and high temperature shall be lined with approved refractory material to prevent excessive heat 
losses and warping of doors.  Doors too large or bulky for hand removal shall be hinged.  At least one observation 
port with cast-iron cover shall be provided on the front and rear wall of the furnace.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.1.7   Miscellaneous</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pipe connections shall be provided for water inlet and drain outlet, drain valves, relief valves, blowoff, air 
supply to soot blowers, gauge and vent, chemical feed, and instruments.  HTW generators shall be provided with 
necessary jets for furnace turbulence, the number and arrangement of which shall be as recommended by the HTW 
generator manufacturer.  Soot blowers shall be provided, if required by the manufacturer.  A suitable smoke outlet 
with steel frame, damper, and damper shaft shall be provided.  Damper shall have high temperature roller or ball 
bearings at both ends of the shaft and shall have a suitable operating arm and rod.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.3.2   HTW Generator Setting Materials</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Materials shall conform to the following:</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Firebrick:  <RID>ASTM C 27</RID>, class shall be as recommended by the HTW generator manufacturer.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Insulating Brick:  <RID>ASTM C 155</RID>, Class A.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Castable Refractory:  <RID>ASTM C 401</RID>.  The minimum modulus of rupture for transverse strength shall not 
be less than<MET> 4137 kPa</MET><ENG> 600 psi</ENG> after being heat-soaked for 5 hours or more at a temperature in excess 
of<MET> 1370 degrees C</MET><ENG> 2500 degrees F</ENG>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>d.  Mortar, Air-Setting, Refractory:  As recommended by the HTW generator manufacturer.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>e.  Brick, Common:  <RID>ASTM C 62</RID>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>f.  Tile, Load-Bearing, Hollow:  <RID>ASTM C 34</RID>, Grade LBX.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>g.  Iron and Steel Sheets:  Galvanized, <RID>ASTM A 653/A 653M</RID>; gauge numbers specified refer to United States 
Standard gauge.  Uncoated, black:  <RID>ASTM A 568/A 568M</RID>, or <RID>ASTM A 36/A 36M</RID>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.2.1   HTW Generator Casing</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  On water tube type HTW generators that will be used intermittently, welded 
wall construction is recommended to minimize corrosion.  In other applications, 
or with fuels containing not more than 0.5 percent sulfur, a casing type enclosure 
is suitable.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>[HTW generator walls shall be steel-encased wall construction with fabrication details as recommended by the 
HTW generator manufacturer.  HTW generator wall and roof lining shall consist of a continuous screen of closely 
spaced water tubes.  Casing for HTW generators shall be double wall construction.  Reinforced, welded, gas-tight 
inner casing shall be constructed of not lighter than<MET> 3.416 mm (10 gauge)</MET><ENG> 10 gauge</ENG> black steel sheets.  Outer 
casing shall be constructed of not less than<MET> 1.897 mm (14 gauge)</MET><ENG> 14 gauge</ENG> steel sheets.  Outer casing may be 
either bolted or welded.  Inner casing shall be reinforced with structural steel to provide rigidity and prevent 
buckling.  Inner casing in furnace section shall abut furnace tubes with no foreign sealer between the tube steel 
and the casing steel.  Casing shall not be attached to tubes.  Each horizontal tube shall be supported independently 
of casing at intervals not exceeding<MET> 1.8 m</MET><ENG> 6 feet</ENG>.  The inner casing shall be applied so as to form expansion 
joints at the point of tube support.  Where refractory is installed at access doors, the double casing shall 
be constructed to form a gas-tight seal and at no point shall combustion gases be able to enter between inner 
and outer casing.  All welded joints and openings shall be checked by a pressure test.  Any casing leakage shall 
be repaired and made pressure-tight.  The maximum deflection of the reinforced panels shall not exceed 1/360 
of the length of the maximum span.  Block insulation shall be applied between the inner and outer casings and 
held securely with insulating pins.  The casing tested shall be capable of holding a pressure of 1.5 times the 
predicted maximum furnace operating pressure.]  [HTW generator walls shall be of welded-wall construction.  The 
width of the fins shall be limited to<MET> 19 mm</MET><ENG> 3/4 inch</ENG> to prevent overheating of the fins under all operating conditions.  
Designs exceeding<MET> 19 mm</MET><ENG> 3/4 inch</ENG> may only be used when provided with supporting calculations and subject to the 
approval of the Contracting Officer.  Tubes shall be seamless type.  The fin-to-tube weld shall be continuous 
and on both the front (fireside) and back side of the fin.  The fin shall not be less than<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> thick.  
The construction shall form a pressure-tight structure capable of transferring a maximum amount of heat to the 
tube.  All welded joints and openings shall be checked by a pressure test.  Any casing leakage shall be repaired 
and made pressure tight.  The maximum deflection of the reinforced panels shall not exceed 1/360 of the length 
of the maximum span.  The structure tested shall be capable of holding a pressure of 1.5 times the predicted 
maximum furnace operating pressure.]</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.2.2   Walls</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  For personnel safety, the design temperature of the casing surface should 
not exceed 65 degrees C (150 degrees F).  Should the designer wish to use a 
design surface temperature between 55 and 65 degrees C (130 and 150 degrees 
F), an economic evaluation must be performed.  The evaluation must determine 
if the additional capital costs for insulation outweigh the cost savings due 
to reduced boiler radiation losses.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>[Refractory behind the waterwall tubes shall be high-duty refractory not less than<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG> thick conforming 
to manufacturer's requirements.]  High temperature block and mineral wool blanket shall be provided between the 
refractory backup and steel casing or between an inner and outer casing.  Thickness of insulation shall be such 
that an average casing temperature in the furnace area will not exceed<MET> [55] [_____] degrees C</MET><ENG> [130] [_____] degrees 
F</ENG> with a surface air velocity of<MET> 508 mm/second</MET><ENG> 100 fpm</ENG>, and an ambient air temperature of<MET> 25 degrees C</MET><ENG> 80 degrees 
F</ENG> when operating at full capacity.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.2.3   HTW Generator Roof</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  For personnel safety, the design temperature of the casing surface should 
not exceed 65 degrees C (150 degrees F).  Should the designer wish to use a 
design surface temperature between 55 and 65 degrees C (130 and 150 degrees 
F), an economic evaluation must be performed.  The evaluation must determine 
if the additional capital costs for insulation outweigh the cost savings due 
to reduced boiler radiation losses.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Refractory lining conforming to manufacturer's requirements shall consist of not less than<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG>
 of high-duty refractory backup behind the roof tubes and sufficient thickness of high temperature block insulation 
or mineral-wool blanket suitable for the temperature encountered to limit casing temperature in the furnace area 
to<MET> [55] [_____] degrees C</MET><ENG> [130] [_____] degrees F</ENG>, with a surface air velocity of<MET> 508 mm/second</MET><ENG> 100 fpm</ENG> and an 
ambient air temperature of<MET> 25 degrees C</MET><ENG> 80 degrees F</ENG> when operating at full capacity.  Manholes and other inspection 
and access openings, and identification plates and stamps shall have insulation finished neatly against a metal 
ring provided for this purpose.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.2.4   Bridge Walls</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Bridge walls exposed on all sides to radiant heat and the products of combustion shall be constructed of super-duty 
refractory not less than<MET> 457 mm</MET><ENG> 18 inches</ENG> thick, conforming to manufacturer's requirements. Walls having only 
the front side exposed to radiant heat and the products of combustion shall have front facing and cap constructed 
of<MET> 225 mm</MET><ENG> 9 inches</ENG> of super-duty refractory and back facing of not less than<MET> 225 mm</MET><ENG> 9 inches</ENG> of low-duty firebrick.  
The base of the wall shall be common brick.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.2.5   Settling Chamber</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Settling chamber for the removal of fly ash shall be provided below the last pass of each HTW generator.  Chamber 
shall have means for frequent cleaning without shutting down the HTW generators.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.2.6   Expansion Joints</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Expansion joints shall be provided where indicated and elsewhere as required to permit all brickwork to expand 
freely without interference with the boiler.  Joints shall be of adequate width, tightly sealed against leakage 
and free from mortar, with the outer<MET> 100 mm</MET><ENG> 4 inches</ENG> sealed with resilient mineral wool suitable for<MET> 925 to 1095 
degrees C</MET><ENG> 1700 to 2000 degrees F</ENG>.  In addition, to allow for expansion of the inner face, a series of<MET> 3 mm</MET><ENG> 1/8 
inch</ENG> wide vertical openings, spaced<MET> 1.8 m</MET><ENG> 6 feet</ENG> apart, shall be provided on the furnace side of the wall.  Proper 
provision shall be made for expansion and contraction between boiler foundation and floor as specified.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.2.7   Firebrick</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Firebrick shall be laid up in air-setting mortar.  Each brick shall be dipped in mortar, rubbed, shoved into 
its final place, and then tapped with a wooden mallet until it touches the adjacent bricks.  Mortar thick enough 
to lay with a trowel shall not be permitted.  Maximum mortar joint thickness shall not exceed<MET> 3 mm</MET><ENG> 1/8 inch</ENG> and 
average joint thickness shall not exceed<MET> 1.6 mm</MET><ENG> 1/16 inch</ENG>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.2.8   Plastic Refractory</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Plastic refractory shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and by workmen skilled 
in its application.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.3.3   Boiler Fittings and Appurtenances</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>HTW generator fittings and appurtenances suitable for a HTW working pressure of [_____]<MET> Pa</MET><ENG> psig</ENG> and [_____]<MET> degrees 
C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG> shall be installed with each HTW generator in accordance with <RID>ASME BPVC SEC I</RID>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.3.1   Thermometer</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Thermometer for HTW generator inlet water and outlet water shall be provided for each HTW generator in a visible 
location on the HTW generator.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.3.2   Pressure Gauge</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pressure gauge shall be provided for each HTW generator in a visible location on the HTW generator.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.3.3   Relief Safety Valves</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>HTW generator relief safety valves shall be installed such that the discharge shall be through piping extended 
to the plant blowoff tank.  Relief valves shall be sized, constructed, and their set pressures shall be determined 
in accordance with <RID>ASME BPVC SEC I</RID>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.3.3.4   Drain Valves</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Drain valves in tandem shall be provided at each drain point of blowdown as recommended by the HTW generator 
manufacturer.  Piping shall conform to the requirements of <RID>ASME BPVC SEC I</RID> and shall be extra strong weight black 
steel pipe conforming to <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>.  Drain valves shall conform to <RID>ASME BPVC SEC I</RID> and shall be the balanced 
seatless type unless otherwise approved.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.3.4   Soot Blowers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>When required, HTW generator shall be provided with soot blowers using compressed air as the blowing medium.  
The soot blower system shall be the automatic sequencing and intermittent puff type, and the soot blower control 
unit shall be suitable for mounting on the generator control panels.  The soot blower units shall be rotated 
automatically in successive steps by their controller, each step involving no more than a<MET> 69 kPa</MET><ENG> 10 psi</ENG> drop 
in air pressure at the receiver.  After one unit is operated in successive steps through its cycle, the controller 
shall shift the operation to the second soot blower unit, and so on, until all units on that generator have been 
operated, after which the controller shall be shut down automatically by the sequence controls.  The soot blower 
heads shall have elements of suitable chrome alloy material for the temperatures encountered in the HTW generator.  
The sequence timer shall have provision for manual selection of the soot blower units to be used.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.4   FUEL BURNING EQUIPMENT</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  The designer must include all the required data for proper design of 
the boiler.  Delete all references to coal and stokers where oil is the only 
fuel to be utilized.</NPR><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<NPR>Paragraphs describing stoker equipment not required shall be deleted.  Stokers 
and stoking equipment selected will be based on the following:</NPR><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<NPR>Boilers having output capacities of 3,517 kW (12,000,000 Btuh) or more will 
be equipped with mechanically-driven grates operating continuously or intermittently.  
Dump grates will not be permitted in boilers in this size range.  Spreader stokers 
will be specified when bituminous coal with ash content on a dry basis in excess 
of eight percent or ash fusion temperature lower than 1200 degrees C (2,200 
degrees F) is to be used.  Pulsating grate units will be water-cooled and complete 
with automatic coal feed and continuous ash removal.  Conveyor stokers may be 
specified if suitable for the type of coal available.  Chain or traveling grate 
may be specified by deletion of one type of grate, or the choice between the 
two types may be left to the Contractor by including both types in the description.  
The following is a general guide in determining which type of grates to investigate:</NPR><BRK/>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
__________________________________________________________________________<BRK/>
<BRK/>
    MW Output                    (Size) Type of Grate and Stoker<BRK/>
__________________________________________________________________________<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
   735 - 5860            Single retort, stationary grate, underfeed stokers<BRK/>
<BRK/>
  5860 - 8800            Single retort, moving grate, underfeed stoker<BRK/>
<BRK/>
  1465 - 22000           Reciprocating grate, front continuous ash discharge stoker<BRK/>
<BRK/>
  1465 - 29500           Vibrating conveyor grate, front continuous ash discharge stoker<BRK/>
<BRK/>
  5860 - 36500           Water-cooled, incline grate, hopper fed vibrating grate stoker<BRK/>
<BRK/>
  8800 - 120,000         Spreader stoker, continuous front ash discharge<BRK/>
__________________________________________________________________________<BRK/></TBL>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
__________________________________________________________________________<BRK/>
<BRK/>
    (MBtuh Output                 (Size) Type of Grate and Stoker<BRK/>
__________________________________________________________________________<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
   2,500 - 20,000        Single retort, stationary grate, underfeed stokers<BRK/>
<BRK/>
  20,000 - 30,000        Single retort, moving grate, underfeed stoker<BRK/>
<BRK/>
   5,000 - 75,000        Reciprocating grate, front continuous ash discharge stoker<BRK/>
<BRK/>
   5,000 - 100,000       Vibrating conveyor grate, front continuous ash discharge stoker<BRK/>
<BRK/>
  20,000 - 125,000       Water-cooled, incline grate, hopper fed vibrating grate stoker<BRK/>
<BRK/>
  30,000 - 400,000       Spreader stoker, continuous front ash discharge)<BRK/>
  __________________________________________________________________________<BRK/></TBL>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The HTW generator manufacturer shall certify that the stoker selected will be satisfactory for the HTW generator 
design.  Stokers and HTW generator shall be capable of efficiently burning coal with fuel sizing conforming to <RID>
ABMA Boiler 203</RID> for Stoker Firing of Bituminous Coals, approximately [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> in size with an approximate 
moisture content of [_____] percent and having the following analyses:</TXT><BRK/>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
               Proximate Analysis                    Percent, Dry<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
                 Moisture                              [_____]<BRK/>
                 Volatile matter                       [_____]<BRK/>
                 Fixed carbon                          [_____]<BRK/>
                 Ash                                   [_____]<BRK/></TBL>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
               Ultimate                         Analysis Percent, Dry<BRK/>
<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
                 Carbon                                [_____]<BRK/>
                 Hydrogen                              [_____]<BRK/>
                 Nitrogen (Calc)                       [_____]<BRK/>
                 Sulfur                                [_____]<BRK/>
                 Chlorine                              [_____]<BRK/>
                 Ash                                   [_____]<BRK/>
                 Oxygen (Diff)                         [_____]<BRK/>
                 Btu/lb. as received                   [_____]<BRK/>
                 Btu/lb. - dry                         [_____]<BRK/>
                 Grindability                          [_____]<BRK/>
                 Raw Fuel Size                         [_____]<BRK/></TBL>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
               Ash Analysis                            Percent<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
                 SiO(2)                                [_____]<BRK/>
                 Al(2)O(3)                             [_____]<BRK/>
                 TiO(2)                                [_____]<BRK/>
                 Fe(2)O(3)                             [_____]<BRK/>
                 CaO                                   [_____]<BRK/>
                 MgO                                   [_____]<BRK/>
                 Na(2)O                                [_____]<BRK/>
                 K(2)O                                 [_____]<BRK/>
                 SO(3)                                 [_____]<BRK/></TBL>
<MET><TBL><THD><BRK/>
               Ash Fusion Temperatures                Degrees C<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
                 Initial deformation temperature        [_____]<BRK/>
                 Softening temperature                  [_____]<BRK/>
                 Fluid temperature                      [_____]<BRK/></TBL>
</MET><ENG><TBL><THD><BRK/>
               Ash Fusion Temperatures                 Degrees F<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
                 Initial deformation temperature        [_____]<BRK/>
                 Softening temperature                  [_____]<BRK/>
                 Fluid temperature                      [_____]<BRK/></TBL>
</ENG><BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.1   Spreader Stokers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Spreader stokers shall be the overfeed self-feeding type suitable for burning a portion of the coal in suspension, 
but sized assuming 100 percent combustion on the grate.  [Coal shall be evenly distributed across the full width 
of the grate by not less than [_____] feeder units.  Unit shall be designed for operation of any feeder independently 
of the others, or it shall be possible to operate all feeders simultaneously.]  Feeders shall be capable of handling 
and uniformly distributing coal over the grate area.  Feeders shall be the mechanical-rotating type, shall have 
no moving parts within the combustion chamber, and where moving parts are exposed to excessive heat, such parts 
shall have all bearings protected by suitable water jackets.  Grease or oil lubrication shall be provided for 
all bearings.  Stoker shall be designed for readily adjustable feed distribution of coal on the grates.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.1.1   Grates</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Grates for spreader stoker firing shall be high air resistant type and arranged for powered mechanical or compressed 
air actuated dumping in sections.  Openings shall provide proper distribution of air under the fuel bed.  [Grates 
shall be in sections to match the feeders with provisions for shutting off the forced draft to each section so 
that any section of the grate can be cleaned while the others remain in service.]  Grates shall be heavy-duty, 
heat-resisting cast-iron.  Mechanical dumping shall be with [air-] [water-] actuated power cylinders connected 
to the grates, and grates shall be furnished complete with cylinders, linkages, valves, and piping as required.  
Each section shall dump independently of other sections.  Necessary over fire air jets complete with fans, ducts, 
and air control valves shall be provided as required for proper turbulence and combustion.  Grate drives shall 
be independent of feeder drives to provide independent speed variation of feeders and grates.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.1.2   Traveling Grates</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Traveling grates shall be high air resistant type especially designed for spreader stoker firing and for continuous 
ash discharge.  Openings shall provide proper distribution of air under the fuel bed.  Grates shall be heavy-duty, 
heat-resisting cast-iron, and individual sections shall be replaceable without taking the grate out of service.  
Air seals around grate shall hold air leakage to a minimum.  Moving grates shall be furnished complete with supporting 
steel, shafts, sprockets, chain, gears, skid bars, and bearings as required.  The front end of the grates where 
the ash is discharged shall be enclosed with a dust-tight enclosure made of heavy cast-iron plates not less than<MET>
 16 mm</MET><ENG> 5/8 inch</ENG> thick and properly protected with firebrick where exposed to the furnace or shall be of refractory 
lined steel plate.  The vertical fronts of the enclosure shall be fitted with refractory lined inspection and 
access doors, one for each feeder.  The roof of the enclosure shall be sealed with refractory to protect the 
metal parts from the furnace temperature.  The underside of the grates shall be enclosed to form a chamber.  
Hopper for receiving the ashes shall be constructed as indicated or as recommended by the manufacturer.  Over-fire 
air jets shall be provided as required for proper turbulence and combustion.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.1.3   Vibrating Grate</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Vibrating grate of high air resistant type shall be especially designed for spreader stoker firing and for continuous 
ash discharge.  Grates shall be either air- or water-cooled with openings to provide proper distribution of air 
under the fuel bed.  Grates shall be heavy-duty, heat-resisting cast-iron, and individual sections shall be replaceable.  
A manual adjustment shall be provided to regulate the ash bed thickness and ashes shall be automatically discharged 
to the ash pit.  The front of the grates where the ash is discharged shall be enclosed with a dust-tight enclosure 
of heavy cast-iron plates not less than<MET> 16 mm</MET><ENG> 5/8 inch</ENG> thick and properly protected with firebrick where exposed 
to the furnace, or shall be of refractory-lined steel plate.  The vertical fronts of this enclosure shall be 
fitted with refractory-lined inspection and access doors, one to each feeder.  The roof of this enclosure shall 
be sealed with refractory for protecting the metal parts from the furnace temperature.  The underside of the 
grates shall be enclosed to form a chamber with a hopper for receiving the ashes.  Over-fire air jets shall be 
provided for turbulence and combustion.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.1.4   Controls</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Stoker controls that accurately regulate the coal feed rate shall be the type required for connection to the 
combustion control system.  Manual setting of the coal feed rate with variation of stoker feed as required to 
maintain any desired capacity between 50 and 110 percent of boiler capacity shall be possible without disconnecting 
linkage.  Separate feeder and grate drives shall be provided.  Grate shall be driven through a variable speed 
transmission with devices for changing speed interlocked with fuel feed regulation.  Manual adjustment of grate 
speed shall be only for allowing synchronization with fuel feed.  All gears and chains of the variable speed 
transmission and gear reduction units, as required, shall run in a bath of oil and be enclosed in a dust-tight 
and oil-tight case.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Front and rear shafts of the grates shall be fitted with a forced lubrication system with fittings located outside 
the setting.  All bearings shall be antifriction type with hardened inner and outer races fitted with dust seals 
and easily accessible forced lubrication fittings.  Stoker and grate shall be provided with safety release devices 
to protect the mechanism from foreign materials or obstructions.  Stoker shall be driven by electric motor.  
Electric motor shall be [totally enclosed, fan-cooled] [totally enclosed fan-cooled for installation in Class 
II, Division 1, Group F hazardous location in accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>].  Motor starter shall be magnetic [across-the-line] 
[reduced voltage start] type with [general-purpose] [dust-tight] [explosion-proof] enclosure.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.1.5   Hoppers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Hoppers shall be constructed of steel plates not less than<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> thick and shall have a capacity of 
not less than [_____]<MET> kg</MET><ENG> pounds</ENG> per feeder.  Hoppers shall be provided with cleanout doors in the front of each 
feeder.  Coal feed to the hoppers shall be fitted with concave type transitions to ensure the proper distribution 
of coal and coal fines across the width of the hoppers.  Stoker front plate shall form the front of the boiler 
for the full width of the boiler and from the firing floor to some point above the stoker where it shall connect 
to the boiler structural framing.  Front shall be cast-iron or steel plate refractory lined with [auxiliary firing 
doors and] cleanout doors of refractory lined cast-iron.  Structural framing as required shall support the stoker 
and its components from the boiler foundation or boiler room floor.  The area under the grates shall be divided 
into not less than four air-tight zones for supply of forced draft having zone control dampers with external 
indicating operating and locking devices.  All pressure parts for water-cooled grates including watertubes, headers, 
and valves furnished by the stoker manufacturer shall be for boiler pressure specified and shall be constructed 
in accordance with <RID>ASME BPVC SEC I</RID>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.1.6   Air Systems</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Spreader stokers shall be provided with over-fire turbulence and cinder and dust reinjection systems.  Either 
air or steam can be used as the transport medium.  Air systems shall be provided with operating air by a single, 
low volume high-pressure fan driven by a splash-proof electric motor.  The reinjection system ejectors shall 
be properly designed, located, and sized for maximum fly ash pickup from all points.  Nozzles for each system 
shall be equipped with manometer connections and heavy-duty adjustable dampers fitted with locking devices and 
position indicators.  Nozzles shall provide maximum combustion efficiency and furnace turbulence.  A manometer 
connection and a permanent manometer shall be provided immediately downstream from the main reinjection air supply 
damper.  A portable manometer shall be provided.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.4.2   Underfeed Stokers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.2.1   Ram-Type Stokers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Single retort, heavy-duty ram-type stokers shall be equipped with stationary or moving grates and side dump plates, 
and shall be provided with electric motor drive and all necessary auxiliary equipment.  Dumping power cylinders 
shall be compressed air actuated.  Stokers shall be capable of handling the coal specified.  Coal shall be fed 
from the hopper into the retort by means of a ram and shall be evenly distributed along the full length of the 
retort with auxiliary pusher blocks on a pusher rod located at the bottom of the retort and actuated by the coal 
ram.  Dampers shall be provided between ash pits and main air chamber under stoker to permit control of air distribution 
to the grate surface.  Dampers shall be arranged for operation from the front plate of the boiler.  Air distribution 
shall be such that the air pressure is greatest where the fuel bed is the thickest.  Air quantity shall vary 
in direct proportion with coal feed rate and shall be controlled automatically.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.2.2   Grate Surface</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Grate surface shall include the underfeed retort area, air admitting tuyeres, side combustion grates, and the 
side dumping plates.  Retorts shall be sectional construction of large capacity and proper shape to distribute 
coal uniformly over the entire grate surface with a minimum of moving parts within the furnace.  Stokers having 
total grate width of more than<MET> 2.1 m</MET><ENG> 7 feet</ENG> shall have movable grates providing positive lateral feeding of the 
coal from the retort toward the dump plates.  Retort and grate sections shall be constructed of heavy-duty, heat-resisting 
cast-iron, shall be cored for proper air distribution, and shall be designed for easy replacement of individual 
sections.  Ash dump plates shall be provided with necessary levers and linkage for hand operation from the front 
of the boiler.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.2.3   Ram Feed</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Ram feed shall be mechanical, pneumatic, or hydraulic driven by an electric motor connected through an efficient 
gear reduction unit, crank shaft, and connecting rod.  Motors shall be [totally enclosed fan-cooled type] [totally 
enclosed fan-cooled type for installation in a Class II, Division 1, Group F hazardous location in accordance 
with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>].  [Motor starter shall be magnetic [across-the-line] [reduced voltage start] type with [general-purpose] 
[dust-tight] [explosion-proof] enclosure.]  Stoker controls shall be for connection to the combustion control 
system to accurately regulate the coal feed rate.  Manual setting of the coal feed rate shall be possible without 
disconnecting linkage, with variation of stoker feed as required to maintain any desired capacity between 25 
and 110 percent of boiler capacity in 10 or more equal increments.  Regulation of the coal feed rate shall be 
by varying the time increments between strokes of the ram.  A throw-out release shall protect the coal feeding 
mechanism from injury in case foreign materials obstruct normal operation.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.2.4   Hoppers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Hoppers shall be constructed of steel plates not less than<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> thick and shall have a capacity of 
not less than [_____]<MET> kg</MET><ENG> pounds</ENG>.  Hoppers shall be provided with cleanout doors.  Stoker front plate shall form 
the front of the boiler for the full width of the boiler and extend from the firing floor to some point above 
the stoker where it shall connect to the boiler structural framing.  Front shall be cast-iron or steel plate, 
refractory lined with [auxiliary firing doors and] cleanout doors of refractory-lined cast-iron.  Structural 
framing as required shall support the stoker and its components from the boiler foundation or boiler room floor.  
Water spray pipes and nozzles shall be provided for quenching the ashes in the ash pit.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.4.3   Conveyor Stokers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Conveyor stokers shall be the grate level feed, forced draft [chain grate] [traveling grate] type and shall be 
provided complete with hoppers, feed gate, drive shaft, sprocket wheels, grate, drive, and all necessary auxiliary 
equipment.  Stokers shall be capable of handling the coal specified.  Coal shall be fed automatically at a constant 
rate from the hopper onto the moving grate and shall be evenly distributed across the full width of the grate.  
The stoker frame shall be provided with not less than four air-tight zones for supply of forced draft and shall 
have suitable zone control dampers with external indicating, operating, and locking devices.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.3.1   Grates</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Grates shall have individual sections constructed of heavy-duty, heat-resisting cast-iron, shall be fitted or 
cored for proper air distribution, and shall be designed for easy replacement of individual sections.  [Chain 
grates shall have staggered links connected by pins to form a continuous flat chain the full width of the furnace.]  
[Traveling grates shall have grate blocks mounted on carrier bars which, in turn, shall be fastened to two or 
more drive chains to form a continuous flat grate surface the full width of the furnace.]  Continuous grates 
shall be supported at the ends by suitable sprockets and at intermediate points on suitable tracks or skids.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.3.2   Conveyor Grate</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Conveyor grate shall be driven by [electric motor connected through a suitable speed-reduction unit] [hydraulically-operated 
variable speed drive].  All gears and chains required for the drive shall be enclosed in a dust-tight and oil-tight 
housing.  Main shafts for the grates shall have a forced system of lubrication with fittings located outside 
the casing or have self-lubricating bearings.  If the forced lubrication system is supplied, bearings shall be 
fitted with dust seals and easily accessible forced lubrication fittings.  Stoker controls shall be suitable 
for connection to the combustion control system to accurately regulate the coal feed rate.  Manual setting of 
the coal feed rate by varying stoker feed as required to maintain any desired capacity between 25 to 125 percent 
of boiler capacity shall be possible without disconnecting linkage.  Feed rate shall be changed by varying the 
speed of the grate.  Air volume shall automatically vary in direct proportion with the feed rate.  Possible feed 
rate shall vary in not less than 10 equal increments.  Electric motor shall be [totally enclosed fan-cooled type] 
[totally enclosed fan-cooled type suitable for installation in a Class II, Division 1, Group F hazardous location 
in accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>].  [Motor starter shall be [manual] [[magnetic] [across-the-line] [reduced voltage 
start]] type with [general-purpose] [dust-tight] [explosion-proof] enclosure.]</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.3.3   Hoppers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Hoppers shall be constructed of steel plates not less than<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> thick, shall have a capacity of not 
less than [_____]<MET> kg</MET><ENG> pounds</ENG>, and shall be provided with suitable cleanout doors.  Coal feed to the hoppers shall 
be fitted with concave type transitions to insure the proper distribution of coal and coal fines across the width 
of the hoppers.  Stoker frame shall be constructed of cast-iron, cast steel, or forgings, and all parts of the 
stoker, except the grates, shall be properly cooled or otherwise protected from the furnace heat to prevent damage 
by warping or undue expansion.  Furnace arrangement and shape shall be as recommended by the stoker manufacturer 
to insure proper combustion of the fuel.  Stoker front plate shall form the front of the boiler for the full 
width of the boiler and extend from the firing floor to some point above the stoker where it shall connect to 
the boiler structural framing.  Front shall be cast-iron or steel plate, refractory-lined with cleanout doors 
of refractory-lined cast iron.  Structural framing as required shall support the stoker and its components from 
the boiler foundation or boiler room floor.  At the end of the grate, the ash shall be discharged into a bunker 
or pit as indicated.  The bunker shall have a dust-tight enclosure made of steel plates not less than<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 
l/4 inch</ENG> thick, properly protected with firebrick where exposed to the furnace, and shall be fitted with cast-iron, 
refractory-lined inspection and access doors, and shall have provisions for ash removal.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.4.4   Vibrating Grate Stokers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Vibrating grate stokers shall be the grate level feed, forced draft type with the vibrating action of the grate 
used to feed the coal from the hopper through the furnace and to discharge the ashes into the ash pit.  Stokers 
shall be provided complete with hopper, feed gate, grate, drive mechanism, and all necessary auxiliary equipment.  
Stoker shall be capable of handling the specified coal.  Coal shall be automatically fed from the hopper onto 
the grate and shall be evenly distributed across the full width of the grate.  A manual adjustment shall be provided 
to regulate the fuel bed thickness.  Ashes shall be automatically and continuously discharged to the ash pit.  
The area under the grates shall be divided into not less than four air-tight zones for forced draft supply and 
shall have suitable zone control dampers with external indicating, operating, and locking devices.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.4.1   Grates</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Grates shall be either air-cooled or water-cooled with grate bars in intimate contact with the water tubes.  
Grates shall have individually replaceable sections of iron or steel suitable for the temperatures encountered.  
All pressure parts including water tubes, headers, and valves shall be suitable for boiler pressure specified 
and shall be constructed in accordance with <RID>ASME BPVC SEC I</RID>.  Grate sections shall be properly designed for even 
air distribution over the entire grate area.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.4.2   Controls</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Stoker controls shall be designed for connection to the combustion control system to accurately regulate the 
coal feed rate and shall be arranged for manual operation, independent of the combustion control system.  Variation 
of coal feed rate shall be accomplished by changing the length of time of the vibrations.  Vibration generator 
shall be belt-connected or gear-connected to the electric motor.  Unit shall be free of any vibration that may 
damage other parts of the boiler or the building structure.  Bearing requiring lubrication shall be provided 
with easily accessible lubrication fittings.  Combustion air volume shall automatically vary in direct proportion 
with the coal feed rate.  Stoker shall be driven by electric motor.  Motor shall be high starting torque [totally 
enclosed, nonventilated] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled] totally enclosed, fan-cooled suitable for installation 
in a Class II, Division 1, Group F hazardous location in accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>.  Motor starter shall be magnetic, 
reversing [across-the-line] [reduced voltage start] type with [general-purpose] [dust-tight] [explosion-proof] 
enclosure.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.4.3   Hoppers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Hoppers shall be constructed of steel plates not less than<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> thick, shall have a capacity not less 
than [_____]<MET> kg</MET><ENG> pounds</ENG>, and shall be provided with a suitable method of cleanout.  Furnace arches of a design 
suitable for the intended use and a type that will insure proper combustion of the fuel shall be provided.  Lower 
furnace sidewall headers in a waterwall boiler shall be inclined to accommodate the inclined grate arrangement.  
Stoker front shall form the front of the boiler for the full width of the boiler and shall extend from the firing 
floor to some point above the stoker where it shall connect to the boiler structural framing.  Front shall be 
cast-iron or steel plate refractory lined with cleanout and access doors of refractory-lined cast-iron.  Structural 
framing as required shall support the stoker and its components from the boiler foundation or boiler room floor.  
At the end of the grate the ash shall be discharged into a bunker or pit as indicated.  The bunker shall have 
a dust-tight enclosure made of steel plates not less than<MET> 15.9 mm</MET><ENG> 5/8 inch</ENG> thick, properly protected with firebrick 
where exposed to the furnace and shall be fitted with cast-iron, refractory-lined inspection and access doors, 
and provisions for ash removal.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.4.5   Burners</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  The designer must include all the required data for proper design of 
the boiler.  Delete all references to coal and stokers where oil is the only 
fuel to be utilized.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Where indicated and specified, each HTW generator shall be provided with oil-fired burner or burners.  The burner 
assembly and control systems shall conform to <RID>NFPA 85</RID>, <RID>UL 296</RID>, and <RID>UL 726</RID>, except as otherwise specified.  Supervised 
manual, semiautomatic, and fully automatic combustion safety controls shall conform to <RID>NFPA 85</RID> and <RID>ASME CSD-1</RID>
.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.4.6   Fuel Oil Pumping and Heating Sets</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>An integrated, shop-fabricated oil pumping and heating set shall be furnished and shall be duplex type, assuring 
100 percent standby and the oil shall be heated by medium temperature water.  Two positive displacement oil meters 
shall be provided.  Each set shall include an electric oil heater of sufficient capacity to heat the specified 
fuel oil to ignition temperature at low generator load until enough HTW is generated to operate the high temperature 
water-to-low temperature water (LTW) heat exchanger and the LTW-to-oil heater.  The electric heater shall be 
controlled by a magnetic starter with a manually-operated ON-OFF switch in series with a thermostatic control.  
When oil temperature is raised to proper level and maintained by the LTW heater, the electric heater shall be 
disconnected automatically by the thermostatic control.  Fuel pumps shall be electric-motor driven.  Each pump 
shall have the capacity of not less than [_____]<MET> L/second</MET><ENG> gpm</ENG> at a discharge pressure of [_____]<MET> kPa</MET><ENG> psig</ENG> with 
a suction lift of<MET> 3 m</MET><ENG> 10 feet</ENG>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.5   COMBUSTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Paragraphs describing inapplicable types of combustion control equipment 
will be deleted.  The type of combustion control system specified for a project 
will depend largely on the boiler capacity, the fuel, initial cost, and cost 
of operation.  Basically, the types should be as follows (the boiler capacities 
are expressed in Btuh and MW):</NPR><BRK/>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
          Type of Control    Coal (MW)           Oil (MW)<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
          Positioning        0.879-15            0.870 - 12<BRK/>
          Semimetering       7-21                7-19<BRK/>
          Metering           7 and above         7-19 and above<BRK/>
          Metering           20 and above        20 and above<BRK/>
          with oxygen<BRK/>
          compensation<BRK/></TBL>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
          (Type of Control   Coal (Btuh)         Oil (Btuh)<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
          Positioning        3-50 million        3-40 million<BRK/>
          Semimetering      25-72 million        25-66 million<BRK/>
          Metering          25 million and above 25 million and above<BRK/>
          Metering          68 million and above 68 million and above<BRK/>
          with oxygen<BRK/>
          compensation)</TBL><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Combustion control equipment shall be provided as a system by a single manufacturer.  Automatic combustion control 
system shall be installed for each boiler in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.  Controllers 
shall be located on the designated heating plant master control center panel.  The equipment shall operate either 
pneumatically, electrically, or electronically.  Pneumatic control systems shall conform to <RID>ASME B19.3</RID>.  Air 
filter regulator sets shall be installed at each control valve and transmitter in the system.  The master air 
filter regulator set on the control panel shall be the dual type where one side can be cleaned and repaired while 
the other is operating.  Exterior control air piping and devices shall be protected from freezing by use of regenerative 
desiccant dryers.  Each system shall be provided with a selector switch or other means of manual control of the 
firing rate when required.  Electrical control devices shall be rated at 115 volts and shall be connected as 
specified in Section <SRF>26 20 00</SRF> INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.  Operating and limit controls shall be wired to interrupt 
the ungrounded circuit conductor.  Controls and instruments shall conform to the requirements of <RID>ASME CSD-1</RID>, <RID>
NFPA 85</RID>, <RID>UL 296</RID>, and <RID>UL 726</RID>, except as otherwise specified.  On multiple boiler installations, a means shall 
be provided to base load on individual boilers while on automatic control and each boiler unit shall be individually 
controlled.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.5.1   Combustion Controls</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Combustion controls shall be the [positioning] [semimetering] [metering] [metering with oxygen compensation] 
type.  A plant master controller sensitive to temperature transmitter in return water header shall be furnished 
to provide anticipatory signals to all generator master controllers.  Generator master or submaster controllers 
shall react to anticipatory signals from plant master and then adjust firing rate as necessary in response to 
generator outlet temperature indication to maintain preset temperature at each generator outlet.  The precision 
of pressure or temperature control, expressed in percent, plus or minus, of the set point of the boiler pressure 
in<MET> kPa</MET><ENG> psig</ENG>, or the temperature in<MET> degrees C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG> during any load swings of up to 10 percent of the boiler 
capacity per minute over the entire turndown range, shall not exceed 3 percent.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.5.2   Stoker Controls</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The combustion control system shall be interlocked with the grate drive to balance the ash discharge with the 
firing rate.  The coal feed flow rate may be used as the index of fuel feed.  Stoker controls shall perform as 
outlined for the stoker specified.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.5.3   Positioning Type Combustion Control Equipment</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Positioning controls shall be a type wherein separate parallel controllers are provided for fuel feed and air 
flow, and both are modulated by the boiler load.  Manual means shall be provided for readily adjusting the fuel-to-air 
ratio for the most efficient combustion.  An adjustable compensating device shall maintain the proper ratio of 
fuel and air over the entire range of operation to provide combustion efficiency within the range specified.  
When a furnace draft controller is required, it shall be supplied.  All controllers shall be flush-mounted on 
the control and instrument panel; all adjustments and calibrations of fuel feed, air flow and furnace draft, 
shall be made at the front of the panel.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.5.4   Semimetering Type Combustion Control Equipment</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Two controllers per boiler shall be provided, one for fuel feed and one for air flow.  The first of these shall 
be positioned in proportion to the boiler load to deliver a proportionate impulse to the second controller which 
shall function in direct relation to that impulse; the second controller then shall measure the fuel feed or 
air flow provided and automatically make necessary adjustments to maintain the fuel-to-air ratio for which it 
is set over the entire range of operation.  Furnace draft or pressure controllers shall be provided where required.  
All controllers shall be flush-mounted on the control and instrument panel; all adjustments and calibrations 
of fuel feed, air flow, and furnace draft or pressure, shall be made at the front of the panel, and indicators 
shall be provided to show the amount of adjustment and the results obtained.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.5.5   Metering Type Combustion Control Equipment</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Metering controls shall provide adequate means for automatically adjusting both fuel feed and air flow in strict 
relation to the load requirements.  In addition, they shall measure the rates of fuel feed and air flow and maintain 
the required ratios over the full range of boiler operation.  In addition to the master controller, there shall 
be separate controllers for fuel feed and air flow.  These controllers shall respond either in parallel or series.  
Air flow-fuel flow cross limiting shall be included.  [If required by a particular system, a separate fuel-to-air 
ratio controller may be provided.]  Actual rate of fuel flow shall be metered accurately in the fuel line to 
the burner.  Actual air flow may be measured by a differential orifice in the forced draft duct.  Operation of 
either controller for both functions will not be acceptable.  In addition, a separate controller shall be provided 
to control the draft or pressure in the boiler furnace.  Controllers shall be flush-mounted on the control and 
instrument panel; all adjustments and calibrations of fuel feed, air flow, fuel-to-air ratio, and furnace draft 
or pressure, shall be made at the front of the panel and indicators shall be provided to show the degree of adjustment.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.5.6   Combustion Control with Oxygen Trim</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Flue gas oxygen trim may be provided as an adjunct to the metering system of control.  The oxygen content in 
combustion gases shall be determined; from this, an impulse shall be sent to the oxygen controller, which shall 
readjust the air flow to maintain the required oxygen content.  The oxygen set point shall be a function of generator 
load with operator biasing capability.  The amount of oxygen controller trim shall be limited to prevent potentially 
hazardous conditions created by equipment failure or misoperation.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.5.7   HTW Generator Limit Controls</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Controls shall be provided to include low generator water flow and high generator temperature.  The limit controls 
shall be interlocked with the combustion control system to provide for generator alarm and shutdown.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.5.8   Burner Control/Fuel Safety System</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.5.8.1   Design Requirements</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  General:  The control system shall be of the microprocessor-based (distributed digital or programmable 
controller) or relay type.  A dedicated hardwired insert panel shall be furnished for monitoring and 
operator interface with the burner control/fuel safety system.  This insert panel shall also provide 
the operator with direct fuel tripping capability in emergency situations.  The burner control system 
shall be sufficiently subdivided to permit inservice checkout and maintenance without impairing the reliability 
of the overall control system.  The logic cabinets shall include status indicating lights for all logic 
inputs and outputs and for monitoring availability of control power to all subsystems as required to 
facilitate troubleshooting.  Indication of equipment status and system permissives shall be provided 
at the operator interfaces.  Where common power supplies internal to the system are furnished, a full-capacity 
on-line backup supply shall be included.  Failure of either power supply shall be alarmed.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Maintenance and Reliability Requirements:  In general, maintenance shall be accomplished on-line 
and without imposing any special restrictions on overall plant operation.  Diagnostic routines, interchangeable 
electronic cards or boards, and clear written procedures shall be provided as a minimum requirement of 
this specification.  Reliability, both software and hardware, shall be incorporated into the system design.  
This shall include redundancy, loop distribution, component specifications and testing, and quality control 
to assure the highest level of system reliability.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Adverse Electrical Conditions:  All equipment shall be capable of operating as specified and without 
damage within the electrical environment of the plant.  This environment includes, but is not necessarily 
limited to, high-voltage, high-frequency surges caused by electro-mechanical equipment, energy coupled 
between conductors by capacitance and mutual inductance, and imperfect grounds.  Input and output isolation, 
shielding, separation of circuits, surge suppression, or other measures which may be required to meet 
these provisions shall be provided.  Inputs, outputs, and other connections shall meet the surge to withstand 
requirements of <RID>IEEE C37.90</RID>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.5.8.2   System Design</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The burner control system shall be compatible in all respects with the HTW Generator and auxiliary equipment.  
The system design shall meet the requirements specified in <RID>NFPA 85</RID>.  The burner control system shall incorporate 
a continuous purge of the furnace to insure that the HTW Generator is free of any accumulation of combustibles.  
The burner control system shall also supervise the operation of the fuel-air equipment associated with fuel oil 
burners.  It shall accept operator commands and, if the required permissives are met, perform the required operation.  
Equipment shall be continuously monitored, and any deviation shall be alarmed while the system either corrects 
the deviation of shuts down equipment as necessary to avoid hazardous furnace conditions or equipment damage.  
The system shall monitor the operation of the fuel equipment and if the equipment fails to respond to command 
from the burner control system, the equipment trip sequence shall be initiated.  Indications shall be provided 
to allow the operator to determine the equipment which initiated a trip of fuel equipment.  Tripped equipment 
shall be successfully shut down before reset of the trip is permitted.  The burner control system shall include 
a fuel safety subsystem which shall include a master fuel trip (MFT) system, ignition oil trip system, and main 
fuel oil trip system.  Each system shall include a hardwired relay which may be directly operated from the operator 
insert panel.  Inputs to the MFT shall include, in addition to those associated with the burner control system, 
those that are required to provide overall HTW Generator protection.  Also, the system shall interface with the 
combustion control system to position and monitor devices for startup and shutdown which are normally modulated 
during on-line operation.  The burner control system shall be designed to operate reliably and to minimize the 
number of false trips.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.5.8.3   System Functional Requirements</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Operating Modes:  The operator shall have the responsibility for initiating the start and stop sequences 
listed below.  Once initiated the burner control system shall automatically place the oil burner in service 
or remove it from service.  The steps each of which require operator initiation are:</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(1)  Purge.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(2)  Igniter control.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(3)  Feeder control.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(4)  Main oil burner.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Furnace Purge and Boiler Monitor:  The furnace purge control shall incorporate prelight off and post 
purges of the furnace to insure that the HTW Generator is free of any accumulation of combustibles.  
Completion of the furnace purge shall be indicated to the operator after which the operator shall reset 
the master fuel trip relay.  A furnace purge shall be required on any master fuel trip.  The HTW Generator 
monitor shall prevent starting any fuel equipment if the furnace firing permissives are not met.  The 
furnace purge control shall provide indications to the operator of the status and the progress of the 
furnace purge.  Permissive indications shall be extinguished when the MFT relay is reset.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Igniter Control:  An igniter group consists of all the igniters associated with a main oil burner.  
Igniters associated with a burner group shall be controlled from a separate electropneumatic igniter 
control package.  Sequential starting of igniters between burner groups shall be provided.  Igniters 
associated with a burner group shall be started and stopped from the insert panel and local pushbuttons.  
An igniter fuel trip (IFT) first out indication shall be provided to indicate the initiating cause of 
the IFT.  This indication shall be extinguished only when the IFT relay is reset.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>d.  Main Oil Burner Control:  Starting and stopping of each main oil burner may be accomplished either 
locally or from the insert panel.  Proven igniter groups shall be one of the permissives required for 
starting.  Fuel oil trip first out indications and a main fuel oil trip (FOT) relay shall be provided.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>e.  Fuel Safety Subsystem:  The fuel safety subsystem comprises the MFT system, main FOT system, and 
IFT system.  Each fuel safety system shall provide the protection for its respective fuel and shall include 
a dedicated hardwired relay which may be directly operated from operator insert panel.  The MFT system 
shall provide overall HTW Generator protection, shall also include a dedicated hardwired relay, and shall 
directly trip all other fuel safety system relays.  The system shall be designed to de-energize to trip.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>f.  Flame Monitoring:  Individual self-checking flame scanners are required for each burner.  Igniter 
flame safety devices shall discriminate individually from any flame that may exist at other burner locations.  
Burner flame shall be discriminated individually from the associated igniter flame and any other flame 
that may exist in the furnace.  Igniter and burner flame discrimination shall cover the range from startup 
to full load operation.  Blocking interlocks from closed valves in flame discrimination circuits to avoid 
false flame indication are not acceptable.  If required to obtain satisfactory flame discrimination, 
extended tube scanners shall be included.  Individual flame detector output level indicators are required.  
Provisions for cooling and cleaning shall be provided, if required.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>g.  Enclosures:  The system logic cabinets shall contain all control devices, power supplies, circuit 
protective devices, cable plugs, and terminal blocks.  Spare space shall be provided to accommodate a 
minimum of 20 percent additional devices.  The cabinets shall be accessible from both front and back, 
and each shall have gasketed hinged doors with latches.  Each door shall not exceed<MET> 610 mm</MET><ENG> 24 inches</ENG> 
in width.  Natural draft cooling of the control system cabinets is preferred.  If cabinet cooling fans 
are furnished, the loss of any fan shall be alarmed.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>h.  Local Termination Boxes:  The system shall include local junction boxes, one at each burner level.  
Burner level junction boxes shall contain separate pushbuttons and indicating lights for local control 
of each igniter group.  In addition, the terminal boxes shall contain terminals for field wiring, internal 
wiring, cable connectors for intersystem wiring, circuit breakers, and if required by the system, relays 
and reversing starters.  Terminal boards for field wiring shall include 20 percent spare connections.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>i.  Interconnecting Cable Requirements:  Interconnecting cables between the logic cabinet, insert panel, 
and local burner junction boxes shall be via prefabricated plug-in cables, including connectors.  Flame 
scanner cables shall also be furnished.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>j.  Buffered Output Signals:  Output signals required for tripping, control, and monitoring shall be 
fully isolated from each other.  The isolation shall be such that an open or short circuit in the related 
equipment shall not affect other control systems.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT></SPT><SPT><TTL>2.6   HEATING PLANT PANELS AND INSTRUMENTS</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.1   HTW Generator Instrument and Control Panel</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The HTW generator instrument and control panel shall be sized to contain all controls, instruments, gauges, and 
meters.  The panel shall be free-standing with faceplate of not less than<MET> 4.8 mm</MET><ENG> 3/16 inch</ENG> steel, properly reinforced, 
and shall be finished with the manufacturer's standard finish coating.  The units shall be mounted flush on the 
panel as far as practicable.  The back of the panel shall be enclosed with sheet metal and with adequate removable 
access panels or doors for maintenance and removal of any unit without interfering with other units.  Proper 
latching equipment and hardware shall be provided.  Each recorder, indicator, and control unit shall be identified 
with engraved metal or laminated plastic nameplates securely fastened to the panel.  The panel shall have continuous, 
rapid-start, fluorescent light fixtures mounted with reflectors providing suitable shielding to illuminate all 
controls, instruments, gauges, and meters.  All field piping connections shall terminate in one bulkhead-mounted 
manifold located to conform with the installation requirements of the system.  All field electrical wiring shall 
terminate in a suitably mounted color-coded terminal strip so located as to conform with the installation requirements 
of the system.  If a pneumatic control system is provided, the panel shall include duplex air supply filter and 
regulator set, mounted on the rear of the panel with properly identified pneumatic terminal blocks and low-point 
drain.  No high-pressure lines will be allowed to enter the panel.  The control equipment shall include the necessary 
operating switches, indicating lights, gauges, alarms, the combustion control system, and the generator and fuel 
safety interlock systems.  If the package type boiler burner units with integral controls are furnished, the 
control equipment for each boiler may be mounted on a separate free-standing panel in accordance with the requirements 
above for instrument and control panel.  Controllers and indicators specified or required shall be panel-mounted 
and tested at the factory complete with relays, transformers, switches, wiring, valves, and piping.  All wiring 
and piping within the panel shall be color-coded or otherwise identified.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.2   Indicators</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Indicators shall be flush mounted with a vertical scale from<MET> 100 to 150 mm</MET><ENG> 4 to 6 inch</ENG> length.  Indicators may 
be either electronic or pneumatic with zero adjustments, receiving standard signals from locally mounted transmitters.  
Scales shall be in engineering units with an accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.3   Recorders</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Recorders shall be servo mechanism type, multiple pen type.  [Circular] [Strip chart] type shall be provided.  
Minimum chart width is<MET> 100 mm</MET><ENG> 4 inches</ENG>.  Accuracy shall be plus or minus 1/2 percent.  Each pen shall have a 
separate scale calibrated in engineering units.  Chart drive shall be 120 volts ac.  One year's supply of chart 
paper shall be provided.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.4   Panel Display</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>As a minimum, the following parameters shall be displayed on the panel:</TXT><BRK/>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
                                    Indicator      Recorder Point<BRK/>
         Pressure<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
          Main hot water header           x                x<BRK/>
          Boiler drum                     x<BRK/>
          Feedwater                       x                x<BRK/>
          Instrument air                  x<BRK/></TBL>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
                                      Indicator      Recorder Point<BRK/>
         Draft<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
          Windbox                         x                x<BRK/>
          Furnace                         x<BRK/>
          Gas outlet                      x<BRK/>
          ID fan inlet                    x<BRK/></TBL>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
                                      Indicator      Recorder Point<BRK/>
         Temperature<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
          Hot water outlet                                 x<BRK/>
          Boiler gas outlet                                x<BRK/>
          Windbox                                          x<BRK/>
          Feedwater                                        x<BRK/>
          HTW differential<BRK/>
           temperature                                     x<BRK/>
          HTW zone inlet and<BRK/>
           outlet (each<BRK/>
           zone)                                           x<BRK/></TBL>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
                                      Indicator      Recorder Point<BRK/>
         Level<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
          Bunker or silo                                   x<BRK/></TBL>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
                                      Indicator      Recorder Point<BRK/>
         Flow<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
          Hot water outlet<BRK/>
           (including totalizer)                           x<BRK/>
          Feedwater                                        x<BRK/>
          Air                                              x<BRK/>
          Fuel                                             x<BRK/>
          HTW (each zone)                                  x<BRK/></TBL>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
                                      Indicator      Recorder Point<BRK/>
         Analyzers<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
          Flue gas opacity                                 x<BRK/>
          Flue gas oxygen                                  x<BRK/></TBL>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.5   Hot Water and Feedwater Flow Measurement</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Orifice plates shall be provided to measure hot water and feedwater flow to each generator.  Nozzles and orifice 
plates shall be flange-mounting type and made of stainless steel.  Orifice plates shall be of the square edge, 
concentric, paddle type, designed for flange taps.  Minimum straight pipe runs shall be in accordance with <RID>AGA XR0603</RID>
.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.6   Pressure Gauges</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Heavy-duty industrial type pressure gauges with phenolic case, solid front, rear blowout, threaded ring, shatterproof 
glass, and<MET> 13 mm</MET><ENG> 1/2 inch</ENG> NPT bottom connection shall be installed for proper operation.  Pressure gauges shall 
be stainless steel Bourdon spring-type with<MET> 114 mm</MET><ENG> 4-1/2 inch</ENG> dial sizes.  Each gauge shall be installed where 
it is clearly visible from the operating level, and all requisite piping and gauge cocks described, or required 
above, shall be provided.  Pressure gauges on high temperature service shall be provided with pigtail siphons.  
All gauges located on pump discharge lines shall be provided with pulsation dampeners or snubbers.  Gauge ranges 
shall be selected so that at normal operation the pointer shall be approximately 50 percent of range.  Gauges 
shall be supplied for the following services:</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>Expansion Tank</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Dump Tank</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Master Control Center</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Circulation Pump Panel</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Distribution System Mains</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Master Control Panel</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Makeup Pumps</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Emergency Feed Pump</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Water Main</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Chemical Feed Pumps</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Air Compressors</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Fuel Oil Supply Header</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Generator Pressure</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>HTW Water Inlet and</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Outlet Duplex</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.7   Dial Indicating Thermometers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Thermometers shall be bimetallic type with stainless steel case and stem, and shall be provided with thermowells.  
Thermometers shall have a<MET> 127.0 mm</MET><ENG> 5 inch</ENG> dial and plus or minus 1 percent accuracy.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.7.1   Expansion Tank and Dump Tank Thermometers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Three thermometers shall be installed on each tank.  The thermometers shall be installed at the drum centerline, 
at the top 1/3 point, and at the lower 1/3 point of the drum.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.7.2   Inlet and Outlet Gauges of HTW Generators</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Inlet and outlet gauges of HTW generators shall be as above, as applicable.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.6.8   Remote Reading Temperature Indicators</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.8.1   Pump Thermometers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>HTW generator and distribution system circulation pump panel thermometers shall be dial type, liquid filled, 
surface panel mounting, back-connected, <MET>150 mm</MET><ENG> 6 inch</ENG> turret type phenolic case, range<MET> 35 to 260 degrees C</MET><ENG> 100 
to 500 degrees F</ENG>, with self-compensating stainless steel<MET> 3 m</MET><ENG> 10 foot</ENG> long capillary having a stainless steel 
separable socket with a<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inch</ENG> extension neck, <MET>150 mm</MET><ENG> 6 inch</ENG> bulb length, <MET>19 mm</MET><ENG> 3/4 inch</ENG> IPS connection.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.8.2   Pipeline Thermometers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pipeline thermometers, as indicated, shall be similar to above with<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-l/2 inch</ENG> extension neck separable 
sockets, where accessible, and with required capillary length where not accessible, for direct reading.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.8.3   Flue Gas and Fuel Oil (if Oil-Fired) Thermometers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Temperature indicators shall be the vertical scale, moving pointer type, in semiflush mounting dust-tight case, 
with curved translucent scales, internally illuminated.  The instrument scale graduations, figures, and range 
shall suit the indicated service.  The instrument shall employ a diaphragm measuring element with linkage actuation 
of the indication pointer.  Thermal sensing element shall be the gas-filled bulb type with spirally wound, bronze 
armored flexible copper connection tubing to the instrument.  Instrument accuracy shall be 2 percent of full 
scale range with a sensitivity of 0.2 percent of full scale range.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.8.4   Separable Sockets</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>At all points of recording, controlling, or integrating instrument temperature bulb insertion, a stainless steel 
separable socket having a screwed cover and attachment chain shall be installed adjacent to a temperature bulb 
for insertion of a test thermometer.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.6.9   Oxygen Analyzer</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>If oxygen compensation controls are furnished, an oxygen analyzer shall be provided to indicate, record, and 
control the percentage of net excess oxygen in, and the average temperature of the flue gas leaving, the boiler.  
The oxygen analyzer shall be of the direct probe type utilizing an in situ zirconium sensing element.  The element 
shall be inserted directly into the process flue gas stream and shall directly contact the process gases.  The 
sensing element shall be contained within a protective shield mounted to the ductwork by an adapter plate, all 
furnished by the manufacturer.  The analyzer shall be equipped to allow daily automatic calibration check without 
removing the analyzer from the process.  That is, sample gases may be injected directly on the sensing element 
while the analyzer is in the process.  The analyzer shall include any temperature compensation of control required.  
The output signal range shall be 4 to 20 mA dc and shall represent 0 to 10 percent as a linear function.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.10   Flue Gas Opacity Monitor</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A flue gas monitoring system shall provide continuous measurement, indication, and recording of smoke opacity 
from each boiler.  The stack units shall include a light source and a light detecting or receiving unit mounted 
in the stack or main breeching, as recommended by the manufacturer.  The control or transmitter unit shall have 
electronic solid-state circuitry and meter or digital type indicator, and provide an output signal for 0 to 100 
percent opacity.  In addition, the control unit shall have calibration and alarm adjustments for compliance with 
Federal, State, and local environmental regulations.  The control or transmitter unit and recorder shall have 
dust-tight metal enclosure.  A purging air system shall be provided to clean light source lens and light detector 
lens.  The control unit shall have adjustable alarm output contacts for various smoke densities.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.11   Fuel Flow Meter</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The meter shall be of the volumetric measurement type incorporating a rotary, positive displacement piston body 
with gear train driven generator and totalizing register, a panel-mounting meter to indicate fuel oil rate of 
flow in gallons per minute, and a transmitter output signal of 4 to 20 mA dc to be used for combustion control.  
The meter body shall be bronze with hard-cast bronze measuring piston.  The generator shall be totally enclosed 
with grease-packed ball bearings, silver commutator, and brushes.  The totalizing register shall be mounted on 
top of the generator housing and shall be calibrated in<MET> liters</MET><ENG> U.S. gallons</ENG>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.12   Water Flow Meter</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Water flow recorder with totalizer shall be provided for each generator.  Recorder shall otherwise conform to 
the requirements specified for the HTW temperature recorder except that flow rates will be recorded in<MET> L/sec</MET><ENG> 
gpm</ENG>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.13   Btu Recorder</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Each HTW generator shall be provided with a recording totalizer which shall integrate temperature difference 
and water flow to provide the net<MET> J</MET><ENG> Btu</ENG> output of the generator.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.14   Makeup Water Meter</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A makeup water meter shall be provided in the treated water line.  The meter shall be of the positive displacement 
type and shall be suitable for operation with water at<MET> 21 degrees C</MET><ENG> 70 degrees F</ENG> and<MET> 450 kPa</MET><ENG> 65 psig</ENG>.  The complete 
meter assembly shall include meter isolation valves and a valved bypass and strainer on the inlet side of the 
meter.  The dial shall be<MET> 254.0 mm</MET><ENG> 10 inch</ENG> diameter vertical type calibrated in<MET> L</MET><ENG> gallons</ENG> and having two hands; <MET>
380 L</MET><ENG> 100 gallons</ENG> indicated on one hand and<MET> 7570 L</MET><ENG> 2000 gallons</ENG> on the other hand.  The hands shall have a manual 
reset device.  A totalizing register shall be provided.  All bearings shall be self-lubricating if submerged.  
The meter capacity shall be [_____]<MET> L/sec</MET><ENG> gpm</ENG>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.15   Master Control Center</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A centrally located master control center shall be provided to serve as the central control and recording station 
for the plant.  The master control panel shall serve as a central point for miscellaneous functions including 
the various alarm circuits with their annunciators and audible signals, and the controls for the system.  The 
units to be installed on the panel are specified under the various paragraphs of this specification.  All necessary 
electric wiring for instruments, panel lighting, and equipment requiring electrical connections shall be installed.  
All necessary transformers, separate relays, switches, and fuses shall be installed in a fully enclosed junction 
box.  A safety switch with fuses shall serve the 120-volt power supply to the plug-in strip and any other power 
supply as required for control circuits.  All wire shall be suitable for boiler room requirements and installed 
according to <RID>NFPA 70</RID>.  All necessary interconnecting piping, terminal block, valves, and fittings required for 
the control equipment shall be installed and supported in place on the rear of the panel and tested at the factory.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.15.1   Panel Board</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A free-standing master panel board shall be floor-mounted on a<MET> 100 mm</MET><ENG> 4 inch</ENG> concrete curb and provided with 
vibration isolators between panel and anchor bolts.  The control panel shall be constructed of specially leveled 
steel sheet not less than<MET> 4.8 mm</MET><ENG> 3/16 inch</ENG> thick with adequate structural steel framework to provide a rigid 
unit.  The panel shall be provided with gaskets and other seals necessary to form a dust-tight enclosure of the 
controls conforming to <RID>NEMA ICS 1</RID>standards.  Nameplates shall identify all controls and instruments.  The panelboard 
shall match the boiler control units and distribution panel in appearance, unless it is a console type.  A suitable 
plug-in strip shall be provided on the rear of the panel for any required plug-in electrical connections of the 
instruments.  All necessary piping or electrical connections and all necessary devices for a complete operating 
installation shall be provided.  Suitable single strip, rapid start fluorescent lighting with a panel-mounted 
toggle switch shall be supplied for a panelhood.  A single, pull chain, ceiling light receptacle shall be installed 
in the interior of the panel enclosure and wired to the common point of electrical supply.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.15.2   Distribution Zone Valve Controls</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A manual valve control for each zone control valve shall be provided on the master panel.  Instruments shall 
be provided to indicate the position of each valve operator.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.15.3   Expansion Tank Water Level Indicator</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A water level indicator shall be provided on the master control panel and shall be of the remote reading, liquid 
level indicator type.  The indicating scale shall show uniform divisions for all level changes and shall require 
no liquids for calibration other than the expansion drum water.  The instrument shall be suitable for<MET> 2,758 kPa</MET><ENG>
 400 psig</ENG> operating pressure.  The instrument shall be so connected and calibrated that it will indicate levels 
of [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> to [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> above the outside bottom of the expansion tank.  The primary or transmitting 
elements shall be located at the liquid level control station as shown.  The instrument shall be so located and 
calibrated that the center point of the indicator will show the normal water level in the tank at [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> 
inches</ENG> above the tank bottom.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.15.4   Annunciator</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>An annunciator system shall be provided with a semiflush mounted panel.  Annunciator system shall indicate and 
alarm on the following:</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Expansion Tank:</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>Overflow level</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Normal level</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Combustion cutout level</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>High pressure</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Low pressure</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Dump tank:</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>Overflow level</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>High pressure</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Low pressure</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  HTW generator (each) - safety shutdown</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>d.  Fuel (to suit firing system):</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>Low fuel oil header pressure</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Low fuel oil storage level</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Low stoker hopper level</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Low coal bunker level</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>e.  Air:</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>Low service air pressure</ITM><BRK/>
<ITM>Low instrument air pressure if pneumatic controls are used</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>f.  Distribution zones (each) - low return pressure</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The annunciator shall be provided with lamp test and acknowledge push buttons.  The operational sequence shall 
be as follows:</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>Condition normal    -   Light off, horn off</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>Alarm               -   Light flashing, horn on</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>Alarm acknowledged  -   Light on, horn off</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>Return to normal    -   Light off, horn off</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The system shall be provided with devices to actuate the annunciator from the above sources, unless otherwise 
specified.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.15.5   Liquid Level Control Stations</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Liquid level control stations shall be provided at the expansion tank and dump tank, and shall include adequate 
detection, sensing, and actuating devices to provide signals for the annunciator system and to control the overflow 
system.  The levels for carrying out the above functions shall be as indicated.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Expansion Tank Overflow Controller:  Overflow control system from the expansion tank shall be provided.  
The expansion tank shall overflow on control signal from the control station specified above which shall 
actuate a motorized normally-closed valve allowing water to relieve to the dump tank.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Dump Tank Overflow Controller:  Overflow control system from the dump tank shall be provided.  The 
dump tank shall overflow on control signal from the controller which shall actuate a motorized normally-closed 
valve allowing water to relieve to the blowdown tank.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.15.6   Distribution Zones Control Station</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A control station for distribution zones valve control shall be provided with one manual valve control for each 
zone.  The instrument shall indicate the position of the valve operator and shall provide remote control and 
adjustment of the valve.  The controlled valve shall be a motorized gate valve in the distribution zone supply 
line for emergency shutoff and flow modulation.  The motorization of the valve shall be such that any partial 
opening of the valve may be held positively without drift or consumption of a power means.  The valve body shall 
conform to the requirements for valves specified in paragraph PIPING.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.15.7   Plant Master Controller</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Plant master controller for nitrogen pressurized systems shall react in response to temperature transmitter signals 
from a temperature sensing element in the return water header and shall provide the necessary signals to the 
HTW generator master controllers.  The plant master controller shall have a manual selector station for selecting 
either automatic control or manual control and a means for adjusting the set point return water temperature control.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.15.8   Clock</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The clock shall be electric synchronous motor type, except as modified herein.  The clock shall be for surface 
mounting and suitable for operation on 115-volt, 60 Hz single-phase electric service.  The clock shall have a 
white dial, easy-to-read black numerals, black hands, red sweep second hand, and external manual reset knob at 
bottom of case.  The motor gear train shall be sealed in a permanent oil bath.  The clock dial shall be<MET> 380 mm</MET><ENG>
 15 inch</ENG> size.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.6.16   Panel Piping and Wiring</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>High-pressure and high-temperature values shall be pneumatically or electrically transmitted, or both, to the 
panel.  Pneumatic signals shall be<MET> 0.69 to 104 kPa</MET><ENG> 3 to 15 psig</ENG>.  Piping connectors to indicators shall be<MET> 6.4 
mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> OD copper tubing conforming to<MET> <RID>ASTM B 68M</RID></MET><ENG> <RID>ASTM B 68</RID></ENG>.  Flow signals shall be transmitted either pneumatically 
or electrically to the panel-mounted receiver.  Copper tubing connections and electric wiring shall be run to 
a terminal block located on the inside of the panel front near the bottom.  Wiring shall be terminated at an 
identified terminal strip.  Wiring shall be suitable for boiler room requirements and installed according to <RID>
NFPA 70</RID>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.17   Pilot Lights</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pilot lights shall be assembled in a factory-built cabinet, suitable for flush mounting in cutouts in boiler 
control panel, complete with extruded trim, clamps, and sheet metal rear housing, and finished in baked black 
enamel.  Lens shall be white plastic and engraved in black ink.  Lettering shall be<MET> 19 mm</MET><ENG> 3/4 inch</ENG> high and black.  
Two lamps per pilot shall be provided and independently wired.  Lamps shall be 6 watts, 24 volts dc, S-6 incandescent 
type, supplied with color caps, one red and one green per pilot light.  Lens bezels shall be black unless otherwise 
indicated.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.6.18   Continuous Emissions Monitoring</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  A continuous emissions monitoring system (CEMS) is required by the Clean 
Air Act Amendment (CAAA) of 1990 if the fuel utilized is oil or coal and the 
heat input is 3 megawatts (1 million BTU/HR) or greater.  A CEMS may also be 
required by state or local laws.  If a CEMS is necessary the designer shall 
review the CAAA and the relevant state or local law early in the project to 
allow time to incorporate the required CEMS specification and to determine which 
fine gas emissions will be included in the required reports.  Before acceptance 
of the installation, the Contracting Officer shall be furnished a written test 
report which provides documentation that the CEMS equipment has passed factory 
and field certification tests required by federal, state and local regulations.  
The investigation will determine if the reported values may be calculated or 
should be direct measurements.  Fill in the data to state what method of measurement 
or calculation will be utilized for the determination of the report variable.</NPR><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<NPR>Emerging flue gas flow monitor technologies are available.  The traditional 
differential pressure technique specified uses familiar equipment that can be 
maintained by plant personnel.  This type of measurement device has reliably 
satisfied regulatory requirements.  The possible use of other technologies should 
include a thorough investigation of flue gas flow monitor regulatory requirements 
and in-house maintenance capabilities.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Continuous emissions monitoring system (CEMS) equipment shall be provided as a system by a single 
manufacturer.  A CEMS, meeting the requirements of applicable federal regulations, State of [_____] and 
local regulations, shall be provided for each boiler in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations 
and under the direct supervision of the CEMS equipment manufacturer.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  The reported data shall include [sulfur dioxide (SO2)] [oxides of nitrogen (NOx)] [carbon dioxide 
(CO2)] [particulate matter (PM)] and other information required by federal, state, and local regulations.  
SO2 reporting shall be based on [analyzer measurement] [fuel flow and percent sulfur calculation] [daily 
heat input calculation].  Nitrous oxides, carbon dioxide and particulate matter reporting shall be based 
on analyzers.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  The CEMS equipment shall include the central processing unit, printer, hard disk drive, and floppy 
disk drive.  The floppy disk drive shall function as a recorder.  The manufacturer shall provide the 
software to generate the required reports in a format acceptable to the federal, state and local regulatory 
agencies.  The operator interface to the CEMS equipment shall be via CRT screen.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.7   NITROGEN PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A complete system of nitrogen pressurization shall be provided including necessary equipment, parts, pressure 
vessels, piping, valves, devices, and accessories.  The system shall allow proper HTW expansion and contraction, 
and control of makeup water with a minimum loss of nitrogen and HTW while maintaining the system pressures corresponding 
to the operating range of the combustion control of<MET> 5.5 degrees C</MET><ENG> 10 degrees F</ENG> above or below the boiler-outlet 
water temperature, without steaming in the system.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.7.1   Expansion Tank</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>One expansion tank shall be furnished.  The tank shall be constructed, stamped, and certified in accordance with <RID>
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1</RID> for an operating pressure of [_____]<MET> kPa</MET><ENG> psig</ENG> and temperature of [_____]<MET> degrees C</MET><ENG> degrees 
F</ENG>.  Connections and piping inserts shall be adequately supported structurally as required for the service.  A 
standard manhole, actuating device for feed water control, alarm devices, gauge glasses, floats, and controls 
as required, shall be provided for the proper functioning of the expansion tank.  Expansion tank shall be hydrostatically 
tested at the factory.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.7.2   Dump Tank</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A dump tank shall be furnished.  The tank shall be constructed, stamped, and certified in accordance with <RID>ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1</RID>
 for an operating pressure of [_____]<MET> kPa</MET><ENG> psig</ENG> and [_____]<MET> degrees C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG>.  Connections and piping inserts 
shall be adequately supported structurally as required for the service.  A standard manhole, actuating services 
for makeup water control, alarm devices, gauge glasses with shields, floats, and controls as required, shall 
be provided as indicated for the proper functioning of the dump tank.  The tank shall be factory tested hydrostatically 
as specified.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.7.3   Expansion Tank and Dump Tank Fittings</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Tank fittings shall conform to <RID>ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1</RID> and shall include the following:</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Pressure gauge.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Water level gauge.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Level controls.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>d.  Thermometer.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>e.  Drain valves; hard seat, seatless pattern; rating 400 to 600 pound class.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>f.  Vent valves; <MET>Class 600</MET><ENG> 600 pound</ENG> steel bar stock, OS&amp;Y.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>g.  Safety relief valves shall conform to <RID>ASME B16.34</RID>, and shall be suitable for a HTW expansion drum 
at working pressure of [_____]<MET> kPa</MET><ENG> psig</ENG>, except all internal parts shall be of steel or stainless steel 
with hard facing allowable.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.8   BLOWOFF SYSTEM</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.8.1   Sample Cooler</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Sample cooler shall be water-cooled shell-and-tube type heat exchanger with stainless steel tubes suitable for 
cooling the blowoff before sampling.  The cooler shall be connected to a header and valved so that the operator 
can obtain a sample of properly cooled blowoff from any boiler as desired.  The cooler shall be properly supported 
and shall have a steel sampling cock.  A sampling glass container suitable for handling the water temperature 
to be encountered and a hydrometer or equivalent device suitable for measuring the concentration of solids in 
the boiler blowoff and reading in parts per million shall be provided.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.8.2   Blowoff Tank</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A concrete blowoff tank shall be provided as indicated.  The tank shall be provided with bolted manhole cover, 
cover plate with disappearing lifts, inlet blowoff connection equipped with mixing nozzle, vent, overflow and 
drain connection.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.9   WASTE HEAT RECOVERY EQUIPMENT</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  For the efficiencies specified, waste heat recovery will be required.  
Designer must consult with HTW generator manufacturers to select the most appropriate 
unit for the size of HTW generator being designed.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Each boiler shall be equipped with [an economizer] [an air preheater].  Units may be separate from or integral 
with the boiler and shall be complete with insulation and jackets, casings, supports, and access doors, and shall 
have provisions for tube or tube bundle removal and for cleaning.  Soot blowers shall be provided as specified.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.9.1   Economizers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Economizers shall be of a type normally provided by the boiler manufacturer and shall include [finned tubes] 
[bare tubes] baffles and headers, and shall have provisions for cleaning and tube bundle removal.  Materials 
shall be capable of withstanding the maximum boiler exit gas temperature plus<MET> 28 degrees C</MET><ENG> 50 degrees F</ENG>.  The 
tubes shall conform to <RID>ASME BPVC SEC I</RID>.  The overall design and installation shall be such as to preclude cold-end 
corrosion under any load condition.  Economizer tube metal temperature shall be above the maximum flue gas dewpoint 
for the fuel being fired under all load conditions.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.9.2   Air Preheaters</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Air preheaters shall be a type normally provided by the boiler manufacturer and shall be the recuperative tube 
plate or regenerative type constructed of materials adequate to withstand the corrosion effects of the flue gases.  
The overall installation shall preclude cold-end corrosion of the air preheater under any load condition.  Temperatures 
of all metals in contact with flue gas shall be above the flue gas maximum dewpoint temperature for the fuel 
being fired under all load conditions.  Control shall be by air-preheat or by automatic bypass and shall be integrated 
with the combustion control system.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.10   DRAFT FANS</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Induced draft fan outlet dampers may not be required in single fan/single 
boiler installations, except to eliminate the stack effect during outages.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Centrifugal fans conforming to <RID>AMCA 801</RID> [Type I] [Type II] shall be furnished as an integral part of boiler design.  
Fans shall be centrifugal with [backward curved blades] [radial tip blades] or axial flow type.  Each fan shall 
be sized for an output volume and static pressure rating sufficient for pressure losses, excess air requirements 
at the burner or grate, leakages, temperature, and elevation corrections for a dirty boiler with worst ambient 
conditions, all at full combustion to meet net rated output at normal firing condition.  In addition, fan sizing 
shall include minimum margins of 10 percent volume and 21 percent static pressure, plus margins of<MET> 5 degrees 
C</MET><ENG> 10 degrees F</ENG> for forced-draft fans and<MET> 22 degrees C</MET><ENG> 40 degrees F</ENG> for induced-draft fans.  Induced-draft fans 
shall be designed for handling hot flue gas at the maximum outlet temperature adjusted for surface fouling.  
[Induced-draft fans shall be provided with outlet dampers.]  Noise levels for fans shall not exceed 85 decibels 
at<MET> 914 mm</MET><ENG> 3 foot</ENG> station.  Fan bearings shall be [air cooled] [or] [water-cooled], and backward curved fan blade 
type with bearings not requiring water cooling may be of the self-aligning antifriction type.  [Scroll sheets 
and rotor blades shall have liners.]</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.10.1   Draft Fan Control</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Variable speed control, inlet vane control and inlet damper control are, 
in descending order of efficiency, capable of control draft fan conditions.  
The choice is based on economics.  However, in erosive services, inlet vane 
control is not desirable.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Forced-draft centrifugal fans shall have [inlet vane controls] [variable speed control] where indicated.  Induced-draft 
centrifugal fans shall have [inlet vane control] [inlet damper control] [variable speed control].  [Axial propeller 
fans shall have variable propeller pitch control.]  Inlet vanes or dampers shall be suitable for use with combustion 
control equipment.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.10.2   Draft Fan Drives</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where motor starters for mechanical equipment are provided in motor control 
centers, delete the description of motor starters.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Fan shall be driven by an electric motor.  Electric motor shall be [drip-proof] [totally enclosed nonventilated] 
[totally enclosed fan-cooled] [totally enclosed fan-cooled, suitable for installation in a Class II, Division 
1, Group F, hazardous location conforming to <RID>NFPA 70</RID>].  [Motor starter shall be magnetic [across-the-line] [reduced 
voltage start] type with [general-purpose] [weather-resistant] [water-tight] [dust-tight] [explosion-proof] enclosure 
and shall be furnished with four auxiliary interlock contacts.]</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.11   AIR DUCTS</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Air ducts connecting the forced-draft fan units with the stoker plenum chamber shall be designed to convey air 
with a minimum of pressure loss due to friction.  Ductwork shall be galvanized sheet metal conforming to <RID>ASTM A 653/A 653M</RID>
.  Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with laps made in direction of air flow.  Ducts shall be 
externally braced and shall be so installed and anchored as to be completely free from vibration.  Access and 
inspection doors shall be provided as indicated and required.  Ducts shall be constructed with long radius elbows 
having a centerline radius 1.5 times the duct width, or where the space does not permit the use of long radius 
elbows, short radius or square elbows with factory-fabricated turning vanes may be used.  Duct joints shall be 
substantially air-tight and shall have adequate strength for the service, with<MET> 38 x 38 x 3.2 mm</MET><ENG> 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 
x 1/8 inch</ENG> structural steel angles used where required for strength or rigidity.  Duct walls thickness shall 
be as follows:</TXT><BRK/>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
  Duct, Maximum Dimension    Galvanized Steel Sheet, Minimum Thickness<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
 <MET>Up through 1525 mm</MET>                     <MET>1.613 mm</MET><BRK/>
 <ENG>Up through 60 inches</ENG>                   <ENG>16 gauge</ENG><BRK/>
 <MET>1526 m and larger</MET>                      <MET>2.753 mm</MET><BRK/>
 <ENG>61 inches and larger</ENG>                   <ENG>12 gauge</ENG><BRK/></TBL>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.12   BREECHING</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Breeching shall be constructed of not less than<MET> 3.416 mm (10 gauge)</MET><ENG> 10 gauge</ENG> steel sheets conforming to <RID>ASTM A 36/A 36M</RID>
.  Breeching shall be adequately reinforced and braced with structural steel angles not smaller than<MET> 50 x 50 
x 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 2 x 2 x 1/4 inches</ENG>, and all joints and seams in the sheets and angles shall be welded.  Expansion joints 
shall be installed as indicated and as required to suit the installation and shall be flexible type requiring 
no packing.  Breeching shall have angle flanges and gaskets for connection to boilers, fans, equipment, or stacks.  
Breeching connections shall be gas-tight and caulked-tight all around and sealed with cement to form an air-tight 
joint.  Clean-out openings of suitable size and at approved locations shall be provided for access to all sections 
of the breeching and shall have tight-fitting, hinged, cast-iron doors with cast-iron frames.  Plastic materials 
polyetherimide (PEI) and polyethersulfone (PES) are forbidden to be used for vent piping for combustion gases.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.13   STACKS</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Stacks for individual boilers shall be self-supporting double-wall insulated type.  Unless otherwise indicated, 
each stack shall be complete with structural steel base, base plates, anchor bolts and nuts, cleanout door, [induced-draft 
fan] [boiler] connection and a thermometer well.  Stub stacks for packaged boiler units may be supported directly 
on the boiler providing the boiler structure is designed to accommodate such an arrangement.  Insulation shall 
be suitable for sustained flue gas temperature of<MET> 485 degrees C</MET><ENG> 900 degrees F</ENG> with intermittent temperatures 
up to<MET> 650 degrees C</MET><ENG> 1200 degrees F</ENG> and the wall section shall provide a "U" factor of approximately 0.26.  Stacks 
shall be fabricated of high-strength, low alloy, structural steel resistant to atmospheric corrosion and conforming 
to <RID>ASTM A 242/A 242M</RID> for both inner and outer shell.  Inner shells of each section shall be provided with an 
air-sealed and concealed expansion and contraction device to allow for differential expansion of inner and outer 
shells.  Stacks shall be extended above the roof to the height indicated.  Plastic materials polyetherimide (PEI) 
and polyethersulfone (PES) are forbidden to be used for vent piping for combustion gases.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.14   ELECTRIC MOTOR-DRIVEN PUMPS</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where motor starters for mechanical equipment are provided in motor control 
centers, delete the description of motor starters.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Electric motor-driven pumps shall be provided.  Motors shall be [splash-proof] [totally enclosed, nonventilated] 
[totally enclosed, fan-cooled type] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled type, suitable for installation in a Class 
II, Division 1, Group F hazardous location in accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>].  Motor starter shall be [manual] [[magnetic] 
[across-the-line] [reduced voltage start]] type with [general-purpose] [weather-resistant] [water-tight] [dust-tight] 
[explosion-proof] enclosure.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.14.1   HTW Circulating Pumps</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>HTW circulating pumps shall be sized and designed for the specific application.  Pumps having a combined rating 
of flow and head that results in a horsepower rating less than<MET> 185 kW (250 bhp)</MET><ENG> 250 bhp</ENG> shall be furnished to 
meet the design requirements of <RID>API Std 610</RID>.  The pump shall be end-suction, top discharge, and be supported 
at its centerline.  Pump sizes with higher ratings than the above shall be horizontal-split case, multi-stage 
centrifugal pumps.  Casing construction shall be either volute or diffuser design and shall also be supported 
at its casing centerline.  All pump ratings shall have, nominally, an excess in capacity of 10 percent above 
the maximum continuous rating of the service.  The required Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH) at the pump design 
flow, head, and speed shall not exceed 80 percent of the available system NPSH at the same flow, assuming a low 
level in the storage tank.  The pump's suction specific speed shall not exceed 9000 at the pump's best efficiency 
point (BEP).  The guaranteed NPSH requirements shall reflect 3 percent breakdown criteria.  The pump's head-capacity 
(H-Q) curve shall be constantly rising to shutoff with no point of inflection.  There shall be no restriction 
to operation at any point from minimum continuous flow to design flow.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.14.1.1   Suction and Discharge Flanges</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pumps shall have integrally cast suction and discharge flanges that shall be drilled to meet the design pressure 
of the application.  The maximum operating temperature, for design purposes, of any feed pump shall not be less 
than<MET> 205 degrees C</MET><ENG> 400 degree F</ENG>.  Casings shall be drilled, tapped, and provided with vent and drain connections.  
Pumps designed for this service shall not require cooling at ratings below<MET> 375 kW (500 bhp)</MET><ENG> 500 bhp</ENG>.  This applies 
to both frame cooling or seal cooling.  Below<MET> 375 kW (500 bhp)</MET><ENG> 500 bhp</ENG>, pumps shall employ antifriction radial 
and thrust bearings, lubricated by flinger rings in a sealed housing.  Seals shall be mechanical with air-cooled 
flush piping conforming to <RID>API Std 610</RID>, Plan 23.  Above<MET> 375 kW (500 bhp)</MET><ENG> 500 bhp,</ENG> pumps shall employ a single 
cooling circuit for both cooling the oil being delivered by a forced oil system to sleeve radial bearings and 
a floating shoe thrust bearing, coupled with the seal coolers for both stuffing boxes.  Mechanical seals shall 
also be provided.  In both cases, stuffing boxes shall be site-convertible to a packed box.  Leakage shall be 
no more than<MET> 0.025 L/hour</MET><ENG> 25 cc/hr</ENG> for a seal life of no less than 25,000 hours.  Bearing rating shall be not 
less than 100,000 hours (L-10 life) at the point of maximum load, as defined by <RID>ABMA 9</RID>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.14.1.2   Structural Steel Bases</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pumps shall be supported on structural steel bases that do not require grouting in order to impart strength to 
the pump for static and dynamic loading from the piping system.  The bases shall be pitched to a low point drain.  
The complete pump and motor assembly shall be shop aligned, using shims on both the pump and the motor.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.14.1.3   Pump Coupling and Guard</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pumps shall be furnished with nonlubricated flexible-disc couplings and a coupling guard.  Couplings shall be 
spacer-type to permit removal of the mechanical seals and limited-end-float-type for pumps with sleeve bearings.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.14.1.4   Recirculation Control Valve</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pumps shall be furnished with a self-contained automatic recirculation control valve that shall be sized for 
nominally 25 percent of the pump's BEP flow.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.14.1.5   Pump Testing</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pumps shall be subjected to shop hydrostatic testing.  One pump in each service shall be subjected to complete 
shop performance tests to demonstrate that, at rated capacity, head is within a margin of plus 3 percent and 
minus 0 percent of design; efficiency is within a tolerance of minus 0 percent; NPSH at the pump's BEP and at 
the rated condition is within a margin of plus 0 percent and minus 10 percent.  Performance tests shall be in 
accordance with <RID>API Std 610</RID>.  Procedures and results shall be subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.14.1.6   Instrument Panel</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Each HTW circulation pump shall be provided with an instrument panel.  The construction and arrangement of the 
gauge panel shall be as indicated.  Nameplates that conform to  shall be provided designating the pump number 
and service.  Letters shall be<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> high.  Gauges shall be surface panel mounted.  The instruments 
shall be as specified above and shall include one single-element pressure gauge for the pump suction, one duplex 
pressure gauge with two elements to indicate flow pressure on each side of the pump discharge regulating valve, 
and one dial type thermometer to indicate the discharge temperature.  Suitable identification letterings shall 
be supplied either on the gauge dial or on a nameplate adjacent to the gauge identifying the service of the gauge.  
A suitable stainless steel socket with cover for a separable socket-type test thermometer shall be installed 
in the pump discharge piping at each circulation pump for future insertion of a test thermometer.  Pressure gauges 
shall have a gauge valve and a pigtail siphon as specified installed at the point of connection with the main 
piping.  Pressure gauges connected to the pump discharge shall have pulsation dampeners or snubbers.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.14.2   Emergency Makeup Water Pump</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Emergency makeup water pump shall be the centrifugal type.  Pump shall be the split case, 2 stage type with closed 
impellers and radial or mixed flow.  Pump shall be designed to handle high temperature water at<MET> 122 degrees C</MET><ENG>
 250 degrees F</ENG>, specific gravity of 0.942, pH of 9.5 to 10.5, and shall have the capacity and head indicated.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.14.3   Makeup Water Pumps</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  If inadequate NPSH is available, the designer shall give consideration 
to substituting either a double suction or positive displacement pump.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Makeup water pumps shall be horizontal, end-suction, single-stage, centrifugal, motor-driven pumps.  Pumps shall 
have stainless steel shafts and bronze impellers.  Pumps shall be provided with stuffing boxes.  Lubrication 
shall be by splash oil with oil level sight glass provided.  Pumps shall be subjected to the same tests specified 
for the HTW circulating pumps.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.14.4   LTW Circulation Pump</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The pump shall be the centrifugal type.  Pump shall be the end suction, single stage type with closed, open, 
or semi-open impellers and radial or mixed flow.  Pump shall be designed to handle low temperature water at<MET> 110 
degrees C</MET><ENG> 225 degrees F</ENG> and shall have the capacity and head indicated.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.15   LTW EXPANSION TANK</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>LTW expansion tank in connection with the LTW water heater shall be constructed in accordance with <RID>ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1</RID>
 and shall have the dimensions indicated.  The tank shall have the openings indicated and shall be provided with 
a protected gauge glass and manual air vent.  The tank shall be tested hydrostatically at 1-1/2 times the working 
pressure or at<MET> 690 kPa</MET><ENG> 100 psig</ENG>, whichever is greater.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.16   HEAT EXCHANGERS</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.16.1   Water Heaters</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Water heaters shall be of the types indicated and shall be provided with thermostatic control valves, valved 
bypasses, strainers, and temperature/pressure relief valves.  Thermometers shall be provided where shown.  Temperature 
and pressure relief valves shall conform to the requirements of <RID>CSA/AM Z21.22</RID>.  Separate valves shall be provided 
if input exceeds<MET> 29.3 kW</MET><ENG> 100,000 BTU/H</ENG> or storage capacity exceeds<MET> 454 L</MET><ENG> 120 gallons</ENG>.  Thermostatic control valves 
shall be installed in the HTW return line from each water heater coil.  The valve shall be installed to operate 
in conjunction with a remote bulb temperature controller and shall conform to the requirements of paragraph on 
thermostatic regulating valves.  Valves shall be flanged, minimum<MET> Class 300</MET><ENG> 300 pound class</ENG>, and sized for the 
service by the manufacturer.  Instantaneous water heaters shall be shell-and-tube design conforming to the applicable 
requirements of <RID>TEMA Stds</RID>, Class C.  The heater shell shall be steel and shall be designed for [_____]<MET> kPa</MET><ENG> psi</ENG>
 and [_____]<MET> degrees C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG> temperature.  The coil shall be U-tube type designed for high temperature water 
at [_____]<MET> kPa</MET><ENG> psi</ENG> pressure.  The coil tubing shall be<MET> 16 mm</MET><ENG> 5/8 inch</ENG> or<MET> 19 mm</MET><ENG> 3/4 inch</ENG> size, constructed of 
No. 16 AWG cupronickel (90 percent/10 percent).</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.16.2   LTW Heat Exchanger for Fuel Oil Heating</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The heater shall be instantaneous shell-and-tube type conforming to the applicable requirements of <RID>TEMA Stds</RID>, 
Class C.  The heater shell shall be steel and shall be designed for [_____]<MET> kPa</MET><ENG> psi</ENG> pressure and [_____]<MET> degrees 
C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG> temperature.  The coil shall be U-tube type designed for HTW at [_____]<MET> kPa</MET><ENG> psi</ENG> pressure.  The coil 
shall be constructed of No. 16 AWG<MET> 16 mm</MET><ENG> 5/8 inch</ENG> or<MET> 19 mm</MET><ENG> 3/4 inch</ENG> cupronickel (90 percent - 10 percent) tubing.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.17   CHEMICAL TREATMENT AND WATER SOFTENING EQUIPMENT</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.17.1   Chemical Feeder</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A feeder unit shall be provided for each boiler.  Chemical feeder shall be automatic proportioning, shot type, 
or pump type.  All appurtenances necessary for satisfactory operation shall be provided.  Size and capacity of 
feeder shall be based upon local requirements and water analysis.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.17.2   Chemical Feed Pumps and Tanks</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Chemical feed pumps and tanks shall be furnished as a package with the pumps mounted on and piping connected 
to the tank.  The pump cylinders, plungers, ball check valves, and check valve bodies shall be of corrosion resistant 
materials suitable for the chemicals being pumped.  Volumetric accuracy of the pumps shall be within one percent 
over the range indicated.  Pump capacities shall be adjustable by positioning crank pin with micrometer setscrews.  
Stroke length scale shall be divided in percentage graduations engraved on scale.  Cylinders shall be replaceable 
for increased or reduced pressure or capacity ranges.  Drive motors shall be suitable for the electrical power 
available and shall have drip-proof enclosures.  Tanks shall be made of polypropylene and mounted on legs.  Tanks 
shall have filling and drain connections and gauge glass.  Each tank shall be furnished with one pump, mounted 
and piped with black iron pipe and fittings, with suction strainer and stainless steel screen, and with<MET> 13 mm</MET><ENG>
 1/2 inch</ENG> relief valve with steel body and stainless steel trim.  Each tank shall have hinged cover.  Tank bottom 
shall be dished concave to a radius equal to the diameter of the tank.  Units shall be for phosphate or caustic 
feed and sulfite feeding.  Motor-driven agitator shall be provided.  The pump shall be designed to feed the chemical 
solutions into the HTW return line to the system circulating pumps and shall have capacity to feed a maximum 
of<MET> 5.3 mL/sec</MET><ENG> 5 gph</ENG>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.17.3   Water Softening Equipment</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  If softening equipment for makeup water is not required, as determined 
in accordance with UFC 3-410-01FA, entire paragraph should be deleted.  If water 
softening equipment is required, list desired water treatment conditions; e.g., 
pH level, hardness, chemical concentrations.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A [single] [double] unit automatic water softener system shall be provided as indicated.  The system shall be 
designed for a working pressure of [_____]<MET> Pa</MET><ENG> psig</ENG>  The system shall be complete with raw and regenerate water 
distribution; under drain; inlet and outlet connection in upper and lower header respectively; resin removal 
connecting pipe legs; control valve for service, backwash, regenerate, and rinse; water meters, pressure gauges, 
brine storage, and measuring tank and controls for automatic operation.  Brine tank shall be either hot-dipped 
galvanized after fabrication or polypropylene.  Brine piping shall be either all copper pipe and fittings or 
Schedule 80 PVC.  The equipment shall have a total capacity between regenerations of not less than [_____]<MET> liters</MET><ENG>
 gallons</ENG> of water of [_____]<MET> g</MET><ENG> grains</ENG> hardness when operating at a sustained softening rate of [_____]<MET> L/sec</MET><ENG> 
gpm</ENG>.  The system shall be based on the data below.  Test sets shall be provided for pH comparator for the range 
[_____] to [_____] sulfide comparator, and phosphate comparator.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.17.3.1   Water Analysis</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The source of the raw water is [_____].  The analysis of the water is approximately as follows:</TXT><BRK/>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
<HL4>Constituents*</HL4><BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
            Sodium as (Na)                          [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Silica as (SiO(2))                      [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Calcium as (Ca)                         [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Magnesium as (Mg)                       [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Iron and aluminum oxides<BRK/>
             as (Fe(2)O(3)), (Al(2)O(3))            [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Bicarbonates as (HCO(3))                [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Carbonates as (CO(3))                   [_____] ppm<BRK/></TBL>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
<HL4>Constituents*</HL4><BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
            Hydroxides as (OH)                      [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Sulphates as (SO(4))                    [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Chlorides as (Cl)                       [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Phosphates as (PO(4))                   [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Carbon dioxide (free CO(2))             [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Total hardness as (CaCO(3))             [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Total solids in solution                [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Volatile and organic matter             [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Suspended matter                        [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Free acid                               [_____] ppm<BRK/>
            Color                                   [_____]<BRK/>
            pH                                      [_____]<BRK/></TBL>
<BRK/>
<TXT>*Numbers in parentheses are subscripts.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.17.3.2   Zeolite</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Zeolite shall be the high capacity polystyrene base sulphonic synthetic type.  Not less than [_____]<MET> cubic meters</MET><ENG>
 cubic feet</ENG> of zeolite shall be provided with each reactor tank.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.17.3.3   Reactor Tank</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Reactor tank sizes shall be based on allowing a freeboard above the zeolite bed of not less than 50 percent of 
the zeolite bed depth, and a maximum flow rate of<MET> 0.679 L/square meter per second</MET><ENG> one gallon/square foot per 
minute</ENG> for each<MET> 111 mm</MET><ENG> 4-3/8 inches</ENG> of zeolite bed depth.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.17.3.4   Softening System</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The softening system shall be complete with all piping, control, and power wiring.  A complete initial charge 
of rock salt shall be installed in the brine tank as recommended by the softener manufacturer.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.17.3.5   Water Test Kit</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A kit complete with test containers, reagents, and instructions for testing the raw and effluent water shall 
be provided in a strong carrying case.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.17.3.6   Treated Water Storage Tank</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Treated water storage tank shall be fabricated from steel plates not less than<MET> 4.76 mm</MET><ENG> 0.1875 inch</ENG> thick for 
shell and heads, and shall be constructed in accordance with <RID>ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1</RID> for a design working pressure 
of<MET> 520 kPa</MET><ENG> 75 psig</ENG>.  Heads shall be dished concave to pressure to a radius equal to the diameter of the tank.  
The tank shall be provided with the connections indicated, an<MET> 200 mm</MET><ENG> 8 inch</ENG> copper ball float, lever-operated 
control valve, valve bypass and accessories, and a protected gauge glass.  The tank shall be the diameter shown 
and shall have a capacity of not less than [_____]<MET> liters</MET><ENG> gallons</ENG>.  The tank shall be hydrostatically tested 
at the factory at not less than<MET> 690 kPa</MET><ENG> 100 psig</ENG>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT></SPT><SPT><TTL>2.18   HTW SPECIALTIES</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.18.1   Sediment Trap and Blender</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The sediment trap shall be constructed, stamped, and certified in accordance with <RID>ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1</RID> for an 
operating pressure of [_____]<MET> Pa</MET><ENG> psig</ENG> and [_____]<MET> degrees C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG>.  The receiver shall be sized for maximum 
plant flow condition of [_____]<MET> L/second</MET><ENG> gpm</ENG> and maximum flow velocity of<MET> 150 mm/second</MET><ENG> 0.5 fps</ENG>.  Receiver heads 
shall be flanged and dished and all tank nozzles<MET> 50 mm</MET><ENG> 2 inches</ENG> and larger shall be flanged<MET> Class 300</MET><ENG> 300 pound 
class</ENG>.  An inspection handhole shall be provided.  The receiver shall be hydrostatically tested.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.18.2   Line Mixer</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The line mixer shall be fabricated as indicated using seamless steel welding pipe fittings.  Area of holes drilled 
in the HTW injector pipe shall equal or exceed 1.5 times the cross-sectional area of the injector pipe.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.18.3   Liquid Level Control Column</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The column shall be fabricated as indicated using seamless steel pipe and standard welding fittings.  Forged 
steel pipe weldolets shall be used for gauge glass piping connections and float switch connections.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.19   AIR COMPRESSORS</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The air compressor units shall conform to <RID>ASME PTC 10</RID>, except as specified otherwise.  Compressor speed shall 
not exceed 900 rpm.  Motor speed shall not exceed 1750 rpm.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.19.1   Service Air Compressors</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The service air requirements shall be as indicated with receivers sized as indicated.  The units shall be suitable 
for heavy-duty service (soot blowing).  The compressors shall be simplex type, single-stage, double-acting, with 
water-jacketed cylinder; fitted with intake and discharge valves of the lightweight feather, disc or plate type; 
and shall be provided with all necessary controls, water-cooled aftercooler, moisture separator, drive, receiver, 
relief valves, and cooling water controls as indicated or required.  The compressor air intake shall be provided 
with a low drop type air suction filter/silencer suitable for outdoor installation.  The aftercooler shall be 
the shell-and-tube type designed for air flow through the tubes with steel shell internal baffle plates and Admiralty 
metal tubes expanded into Muntz metal tube sheets.  The moisture separator shall be provided with an automatic 
water discharge trap and level gauge.  The air receiver shall be vertical type constructed in accordance with <RID>
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1</RID> and shall be equipped with flanged inlet and outlet connections, valved drain connection, <MET>
152 mm</MET><ENG> 6 inch</ENG> dial pressure gauge, pop safety valves, and regulator connections.  Cooling water controls for 
regulating compressor cylinder water temperature and aftercooler water temperature shall be thermostatic valve 
type and shall be installed with a three-valve bypass in the water outlet lines ahead of open sight drain funnels.  
The compressor shall be equipped with adjustable, pressure type unloader controls suitable for continuous compressor 
operation.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.19.2   Instrument Air Compressors</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  The designer should determine if two redundant full size instrument air 
compressors will be required as loss of air will cause unit shutdown unless 
other provisions are made, such as crossties to the soot blower/service air 
system.  Delete paragraph if not required.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>An electric motor-driven oil-free automatic air compressor unit and a refrigerating drying unit shall be provided.  
The air compressor shall be capable of delivering at a pressure of [_____]<MET> kPa</MET><ENG> psig</ENG> not less than<MET> 0.00472 cubic 
meter/sec</MET><ENG> 10 scfm</ENG> dry air at an atmospheric dew point of<MET> -18 degrees C</MET><ENG> 10 degrees F</ENG> with entering air at<MET> 35 degrees 
C</MET><ENG> 95 degrees F</ENG>, saturated.  The air compressor unit shall be sized to run not more than 60 percent of the time 
when all controls are in service.  The air compressor unit shall be complete with all necessary accessories including 
automatic pressure control equipment, relief valves, check valves, air filters, moisture traps, and a receiver 
with ample capacity for emergency operation of the controls for 15 minutes after compressor shutdown.  The receiver 
shall be of vertical construction, in accordance with <RID>ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1</RID>, with relief valve and drain fittings.  
The air dryer shall be a self-contained, refrigerated type complete with refrigeration compressor, heat exchanger, 
automatic controls, and moisture removal trap or a regenerative desiccant type dryer, as required.  The refrigeration 
unit shall be the hermetically-sealed type capable of continuous operation at maximum load conditions.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.20   PIPING</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Unless otherwise specified herein, pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of <RID>ASME B31.1</RID>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.1   Pipe</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pipe material shall be as specified in TABLE I, except fuel oil pipe material shall comply with Section 
<SRF>33 56 10</SRF> FACTORY-FABRICATED FUEL STORAGE TANKS.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.2   Fittings</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pipe fittings shall be as specified in TABLE II, except fuel oil fittings shall comply with Section <SRF>33 56 10</SRF> 
FACTORY-FABRICATED FUEL STORAGE TANKS.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.3   Nipples</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Nipples shall conform to <RID>ASTM A 733</RID>, Type I or II, as required to match adjacent piping.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.4   Unions</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Unions shall conform to <RID>ASME B16.39</RID>, type as required to match adjacent piping.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.5   Pipe Threads</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pipe threads shall conform to <RID>ASME B1.20.1</RID>, right- or left-hand tapered thread as required.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.6   Pipe Expansion</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.6.1   Expansion Joints</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Expansion joints shall be designed for a HTW working pressure not less than [_____]<MET> kPa</MET><ENG> psig</ENG> and shall be in 
accordance with applicable requirements of <RID>ASME B31.1</RID> and <RID>EJMA Stds</RID>.  End connections shall be flanged.  [Service 
outlets shall be provided where indicated or required.]  Type II joints shall be suitable for repacking under 
full line pressure.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.6.2   Flexible Ball Joints</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Flexible ball joints shall be constructed of [stainless steel] [carbon steel] or other alloys as appropriate 
for the service intended.  The joints shall be flanged or welded end as required and shall be capable of absorbing 
the normal operating axial, lateral, or angular movements or combination thereof.  The ball-type joint shall 
be designed and constructed in accordance with <RID>ASME B31.1</RID> and <RID>ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1</RID> where applicable.  Flanges 
shall conform to the diameter and drilling of <RID>ASME B16.5</RID>.  Molded gaskets shall be suitable for the service intended.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.20.7   Valves</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Valves shall be installed at all indicated locations, where specified, and where required for proper functioning 
and servicing of the system.  Motor-operated valves shall be capable of closing speeds of<MET> 2.5 to 5.1 mm/sec</MET><ENG> 6 
to 12 inches/minute</ENG>.  Motor operators shall be equipped with position indicators, valve stem protectors above 
the motor operating units, and auxiliary handwheels for manual operation of the valves in the event of power 
failure.  Motors shall be suitable for operation on the electric current characteristics indicated.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.7.1   Check Valves</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  The designer will indicate the type of valves, vertical lift or horizontal, 
on the drawings.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Valves for<MET> Class 125</MET><ENG> 125 pound class</ENG> steel piping shall conform to the following:</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(1)  Sizes<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG> and less, bronze:  <RID>MSS SP-80</RID>, Type 3 or 4, Class 125.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(2)  Sizes<MET> 80 mm</MET><ENG> 3 inches</ENG> through<MET> 600 mm</MET><ENG> 24 inches</ENG>, cast-iron:  <RID>MSS SP-71</RID>, Type III or IV, Class 
125.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Valves for<MET> Class 150</MET><ENG> 150 poundclass</ENG> steel piping shall conform to the following:</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(1)  Sizes<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG> and less, bronze:  <RID>MSS SP-80</RID>, Class 150 minimum.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(2)  Sizes<MET> 80 mm</MET><ENG> 3 inches</ENG> through<MET> 600 mm</MET><ENG> 24 inches</ENG>, steel:  <RID>ASME B16.34</RID>, Class 150 minimum, 
flanged ends, swing disc.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Valves for<MET> Class 300</MET><ENG> 300 pound class</ENG> steel piping shall conform to the following:</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(1)  Sizes<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG> and less, bronze:  <RID>MSS SP-80</RID>, Class 300 minimum.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(2)  Sizes<MET> 80 mm</MET><ENG> 3 inches</ENG> through<MET> 600 mm</MET><ENG> 24 inches</ENG>, steel:  <RID>ASME B16.34</RID>, Class 300 minimum flanged 
ends, swing disc.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.7.2   Gate Valves</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Unless otherwise indicated or specified, gate valves used as shutoff valves at main headers and elsewhere, as 
indicated, shall be the chain-operated type and shall have sufficient chain for easy operation from the operating 
floor or walkway.  Gate valves<MET> 200 mm</MET><ENG> 8 inches</ENG> and larger shall be provided with a globe valve bypass.  Gate 
valves shall be the wedge disc type with outside screw and yoke and bonnet bushings.  Valve body shall have straight-through 
ports without recesses except between seats to assure minimum turbulence, erosion, and resistance to flow.  Motor-operated 
gate valves shall be installed in the HTW supply and return mains, where indicated, to isolate the distribution 
zones from the plant in case of a line break.  The valves shall be closed by a pressure switch operated by return 
main water pressure.  The pressure switch shall be the Bourdon tube, actuated mercury switch type with an adjustable 
operating range of<MET> 345 to 2413 kPa</MET><ENG> 50 to 350 psi</ENG>.  A three-position selector switch shall also be provided for 
automatic or manual operation of the valve position.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Valves for<MET> Class 125</MET><ENG> 125 pound class</ENG> steel piping shall conform to the following:</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(1)  Sizes<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG> and less, bronze:  <RID>MSS SP-80</RID>, Type 1 or 2, Class 125.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(2)  Sizes<MET> 80 mm</MET><ENG> 3 inches</ENG> through<MET> 1200 mm</MET><ENG> 48 inches</ENG>, cast-iron:  <RID>MSS SP-70</RID>, Type I, Class 125, 
Design OT or OF (OS&amp;Y), bronze trim.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Valves for<MET> Class 150</MET><ENG> 150 pound class</ENG> steel piping shall conform to the following:</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(1)  Sizes<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG> and less, bronze:  <RID>MSS SP-80</RID>, Type 1 or 2, Class 150 minimum.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(2)  Sizes<MET> 80 mm</MET><ENG> 3 inches</ENG> through<MET> 610 mm</MET><ENG> 24 inches</ENG>, steel:  <RID>ASME B16.34</RID>, Class 150 minimum, 
flanged ends.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Valves for<MET> Class 300</MET><ENG> 300 pound class</ENG> steel piping shall conform to the following:</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(1)  Sizes<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG> and less, bronze:  <RID>MSS SP-80</RID>, Type 1 or 2, Class 300 minimum.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(2)  Sizes<MET> 80 mm</MET><ENG> 3 inches</ENG> through<MET> 610 mm</MET><ENG> 24 inches</ENG>, steel:  <RID>ASME B16.34</RID>, Class 300 minimum, 
flanged ends.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.7.3   Globe Valves and Angle Valves</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Globe type valves shall have outside screw and yoke with bolted bonnets, stainless steel trim, and flat seats, 
but shall not be the reversed cup type.  The stuffing boxes shall be large and deep.  Valves shall be installed 
with the stem horizontal or above.  A distribution system bypass motor-operated globe-valved piping connection 
between the supply and return mains, where required, shall be installed to ensure uninterrupted water flow to 
the HTW generator in case of low return pressure.  In operation, valve shall modulate to the open position on 
low return main pressure signal.  A three position selector switch shall be provided for automatic or manual 
selection of valve position.  For each distribution zone, a manually-operated handwheel or chainwheel globe valve 
shall be installed in each high temperature return main to control the flow and the resultant differential temperature 
drop through each system.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Valves for<MET> Class 125</MET><ENG> 125 pound class</ENG> steel piping shall conform to the following:</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(1)  Sizes<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG> and less, bronze:  <RID>MSS SP-80</RID>, Type 1, 2, or 3, Class 125.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(2)  Sizes<MET> 80 mm</MET><ENG> 3 inches</ENG> through<MET> 300 mm</MET><ENG> 12 inches</ENG>, cast-iron:  <RID>MSS SP-85</RID>, Type III and Type 
IV, Class 125.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Valves for<MET> Class 150</MET><ENG> 150 pound class</ENG> steel piping shall conform to the following:</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(1)  Sizes<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG> and less, bronze:  <RID>MSS SP-80</RID>, Type 1, 2, or 3, Class 150 minimum.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(2)  Sizes<MET> 80 mm</MET><ENG> 3 inches</ENG> through<MET> 610 mm</MET><ENG> 24 inches</ENG>, steel:  <RID>ASME B16.34</RID>, Class 150 minimum, 
flanged ends.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Valves for<MET> Class 300</MET><ENG> 300 pound class</ENG> steel piping shall conform to the following:</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(1)  Sizes<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG> and less, bronze:  <RID>MSS SP-80</RID>, Type 1, 2, or 3, Class 300 minimum.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<ITM>(2)  Sizes<MET> 80 mm</MET><ENG> 3 inches</ENG> through<MET> 610 mm</MET><ENG> 24 inches</ENG>, steel:  <RID>ASME B16.34</RID>, Class 300 minimum, 
flanged ends.</ITM><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.7.4   Thermostatic Regulating Valve</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Cooling Water Control Valves:  A thermostatically-operated flow control valve shall be installed 
in the cooling water piping from each HTW circulating pump, each air compressor, and each aftercooler 
to control the flow of the cooling water automatically, to prevent the waste of water, and provide proper 
operating temperature for the bearings.  The valve shall match the piping size to which it is connected.  
Valves shall be suitable for operation on<MET> 1,034 kPa</MET><ENG> 150 psi</ENG> water pressure, shall have threaded ends, 
and shall be direct-acting to open on temperature increase.  The valve body shall have a<MET> 3.2 mm</MET><ENG> 1/8 inch</ENG>
 hole drilled through the wall separating the inlet and outlet ports so that water circulation is not 
completely shut off.  The valve shall have a nonmetallic disc and means for preventing the water from 
coming in contact with the range spring and sliding parts.  A manual adjustment of the setting shall 
be provided.  The range shall be<MET> 29 to 51 degrees C</MET><ENG> 85 to 125 degrees F</ENG> and factory set for<MET> 38 degrees 
C</MET><ENG> 100 degrees F</ENG>.  The temperature bulb shall be for closed tank immersion with<MET> 13 mm</MET><ENG> 1/2 inch</ENG> NPT connector.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Makeup Water Heater Control Valve:  A temperature controller shall be installed in the high temperature 
return water line from the feedwater heater coil.  The valve shall be motor-operated and shall operate 
in conjunction with the remote bulb temperature controller.  Both valve and controller shall be the reverse-acting 
type failing in the closed position.  The normal operating range shall be fully open at<MET> 79 degrees C</MET><ENG> 
175 degrees F</ENG> and fully closed at<MET> 100 degrees C</MET><ENG> 210 degrees F</ENG> feedwater temperature.  The controller 
shall modulate the flow between these points.  The valve shall have a cast steel body, stainless steel 
trim, and lubricated deep-type stuffing box with packing suitable for the conditions.  The valve disc 
shall be top-and-bottom guided of the equal percentage type.  The valve shall be single-seated for tight 
closing, [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inch</ENG> body size, flanged, passing [_____]<MET> kg/sec</MET><ENG> pounds/hour</ENG> of HTW at a maximum pressure 
drop of<MET> 15 m</MET><ENG> 50 foot</ENG> head.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  LTW Heater Control Valve:  A thermostatic control valve shall be installed to operate in conjunction 
with a remote bulb temperature controller.  The valve operating range shall be<MET> 93 to 110 degrees C</MET><ENG> 200 
to 225 degrees F</ENG> and valve shall modulate the flow of HTW to maintain LTW between these temperatures.  
The valve shall have a cast steel body with stainless steel trim, and lubricated deep-type stuffing box 
with packing suitable for the temperature and pressure conditions.  The valve shall be single-seated, 
[_____] body size, to pass [_____]<MET> kg/sec</MET><ENG> pounds/hour</ENG> of HTW at a maximum pressure drop of<MET> 15 m</MET><ENG> 50 foot</ENG>
 head.  The temperature bulb shall be for pipeline insertion with<MET> 19 mm</MET><ENG> 3/4 inch</ENG> NPT connector.  Necessary 
appurtenances including bypass valve and combination temperature-pressure relief valve shall be provided.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>d.  Domestic Water Heater Control Valve:  A thermostatic control valve shall be installed to operate 
in conjunction with a remote bulb temperature controller.  The valve operating range shall be<MET> 38 to 70 
degrees C</MET><ENG> 100 to 160 degrees F</ENG> and valve shall be adjustable and modulate the flow of HTW to the heater 
between these temperatures.  The valve shall have a cast steel body with stainless steel trim and lubricated 
deep-type stuffing box with packing suitable for the temperature and pressure conditions.  The valve 
shall be single-seated, [_____] body to pass [_____]<MET> kg/sec</MET><ENG> pounds/hour</ENG> of HTW at a maximum pressure 
drop of<MET> 15 m</MET><ENG> 50 foot</ENG> head.  The temperature bulb shall be for pipeline insertion with<MET> 19 mm</MET><ENG> 3/4 inch</ENG> 
NPT connector.  Necessary appurtenances including bypass valve, strainer, and combination temperature-pressure 
relief valve shall be provided.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.20.8   Back Pressure Relief Valves</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Back pressure relief valves shall have steel bodies and shall be equipped with corrosion resistant trim and valve 
seats.  The valves shall be properly guided and shall be positive closing so that no leakage can result.  Adjustment 
of the desired back pressure shall cover the range between<MET> 13 to 70 kPa</MET><ENG> 2 to 10 psig</ENG>.  The adjustment shall be 
made externally and any shafts extending through the valve body shall be provided with adjustable stuffing boxes 
having renewable packing.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.9   Exhaust Heads</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Exhaust heads for the discharge of flash steam to atmosphere shall be one-piece construction of steel plate, 
semisteel, or cast-iron with suitable baffle arrangement for the removal of entrained condensate and oil, and 
with drain connection.  Flow area through unit shall be larger than connecting pipe.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.10   Strainers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The strainer body connections shall be the same size as the pipelines in which the connections are installed.  
The strainer bodies shall be heavy and durable cast steel.  The bodies shall have arrows clearly cast on the 
sides to indicate the direction of flow.  Each strainer shall be equipped with an easily removable cover and 
sediment basket.  The basket shall be not less than<MET> 0.063 mm</MET><ENG> 0.0025 inch</ENG> thick stainless steel with enough small 
perforations to provide a net free area through the basket of at least 3.30 times that of the entering pipe.  
The flow shall be into the basket and out through the perforations.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.11   Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to <RID>MSS SP-58</RID> and <RID>MSS SP-69</RID>, except as modified herein.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.11.1   Types 5, 12, and 26</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.11.2   Type 3</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe which has a vapor barrier.  Type 3 may be used on insulated pipe that 
does not have a vapor barrier if clamped directly to the pipe and if the clamp bottom does not extend through 
the insulation and the top clamp attachment does not contact the insulation during pipe movement.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.11.3   Type 18</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed.  Continuous inserts which allow 
more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for Type 18 inserts.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.11.4   Types 19 and 23</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Types 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued in accordance with <RID>MSS SP-69</RID> and have both locknuts and retaining devices 
furnished by the manufacturer.  Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.11.5   Type 20</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or 
adapter.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.11.6   Type 24</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.11.7   Type 39 Saddle or Type 40 Shield</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Where Type 39 saddle or Type 40 shield is permitted for a particular pipe attachment application, the Type 39 
saddle shall be used on all pipe<MET> 100 mm</MET><ENG> 4 inches</ENG> and larger.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.11.8   Horizontal Pipe Supports</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in <RID>MSS SP-69</RID> and a support shall be installed not over<MET> 
300 mm</MET><ENG> 1 foot</ENG> from the pipe fitting joint at each changes in direction of the piping.  Pipe supports shall be 
spaced not over<MET> 1.5 m</MET><ENG> 5 feet</ENG> apart at valves.  In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, 
a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member.  Spacing of the base support members 
shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for any of the individual pipes in the multiple pipe 
run.  The clips or clamps shall be rigidly connected to the common base member.  A clearance of<MET> 3 mm</MET><ENG> 1/8 inch</ENG>
 shall be provided between the pipe and clip or clamp for all piping which may be subjected to thermal expansion.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.11.9   Vertical Pipe Supports</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, and at intervals of not more than<MET> 4.5 
m</MET><ENG> 15 feet</ENG> not more than<MET> 2.4 m</MET><ENG> 8 feet</ENG> from end of risers, and at vent terminations.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.11.10   Type 35 Guides with Slides</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided, where 
required, to allow longitudinal pipe movement.  Lateral restraints shall be provided as required.  Slide materials 
shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Where steel slides do not require provisions for restraint of lateral movement, an alternate guide 
method may be used.  On piping<MET> 100 mm</MET><ENG> 4 inches</ENG> and larger, a Type 39 saddle may be welded to the pipe 
and freely rest on a steel plate.  On piping under<MET> 100 mm</MET><ENG> 4 inches</ENG>, a Type 40 protection shield may be 
attached to the pipe or insulation and freely rest on a steel slide plate.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not desirable, then the Type 35 
guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe.  
The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least<MET> 100 mm</MET><ENG> 4 inches</ENG>, or by an amount adequate 
for the insulation, whichever is greater.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.11.11   Pipe Hangers on Horizontal Insulated Pipes</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipes, except Type 3, shall be the size of the outside diameter of the insulation.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.20.11.12   Piping in Trenches</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Detail of piping supported in trenches will be shown on the drawings.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Piping in trenches shall be supported as indicated.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT></SPT><SPT><TTL>2.21   INSULATION</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Shop and field applied insulation shall be as specified in Section <SRF>23 07 00</SRF> THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL 
SYSTEMS.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.22   TOOLS</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Special tools only shall be furnished and shall include all uncommon tools necessary for the operation and maintenance 
of boilers, stokers, pumps, fans, controls, meters, special piping systems, and other equipment.  Small hand 
tools shall be furnished with a suitable cabinet, mounted where directed.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.22.1   Smoke Pipe Cleaner</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Cleaner shall be provided to clean the breeching and smoke connections.  Cleaner shall have jointed handle of 
sufficient length to clean breeching and smoke connections without dismantling.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.22.2   Firing Tools</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Firing tools including hoe, poker, and slice bar shall be provided for each boiler.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.22.3   Wrenches and Gaskets</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Wrenches shall be provided as required for opening boiler manholes, handholes, and cleanouts.  One set of extra 
gaskets shall be provided for boiler manholes and handholes, for pump barrels, and other similar items of equipment.  
Gaskets shall be packaged and properly identified.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.23   FUEL OIL TANKS</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.23.1   Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Storage tanks shall be constructed in accordance with Section <SRF>33 56 10</SRF> FACTORY-FABRICATED FUEL STORAGE TANKS.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.23.2   Hot-Water Coil</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Coil constructed of<MET> 25 mm</MET><ENG> 1 inch</ENG> seamless steel tubing shall be provided in each tank for No. 6 fuel oil and 
installed around the suction end of the oil line.  Coil in each tank shall have capacity to heat from [_____] 
to [_____]<MET> degrees C</MET><ENG> degrees F</ENG> the maximum demand of all oil burners connected to the tank when supplied at<MET> 115 
degrees C</MET><ENG> 240 degrees F</ENG>.  Heater shall be provided with automatic temperature-control valve, with strainer and 
three-valve by-pass in heated water supply line, and with check valve and cutoff valve in return line.  An additional 
manhole located above the heater shall be provided for removal of the heater as a unit.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.23.3   Tank Accessories</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Accessories shall comply with Section <SRF>33 56 10</SRF> FACTORY-FABRICATED FUEL STORAGE TANKSS.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.24   COAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.1   Screw Conveyor</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where motor starters for mechanical equipment are provided in motor control 
centers, delete the description of motor starters.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Screw conveyor for the lateral distribution of coal shall consist of steel screw conveyor with capacity of not 
less than [_____]<MET> cubic meters/sec</MET><ENG> cubic feet/hour</ENG> when handling coal of the specified maximum lump size.  Maximum 
capacity of the conveyor shall be based on the screws carrying not more than 30 percent of their cross section 
(except feeder conveyors), and the maximum speed of conveyor shall be 60 rpm.  Conveyor and housing shall be 
assembled in sections.  The sectional flights shall be mounted on steel pipe and connected by coupling shafts.  
A feeder conveyor may be installed to assume the proper distribution of the load.  Both the feeder screw and 
the extended screw shall have their flights mounted on the same pipe.  The conveyor shall be provided with sectional 
supporting hanger bearings of the babbitted type.  Conveyor length between bearings shall not exceed<MET> 3.6 m</MET><ENG> 12 
feet</ENG>.  Trough ends shall be fabricated cast-iron type with feet and fitted with babbitted bearings.  The drive 
shall be at the discharge end of the conveyor and shall consist of an electric gear motor and chain drive.  The 
chain drive from the motor to the reducer shall be enclosed in an oil-tight casing.  Thrust in either direction 
shall be absorbed by the thrust bearings.  The motor may be mounted on top of the trough.  The trough conveyor 
housing shall be not less than<MET> 4.8 mm</MET><ENG> 3/16 inch</ENG> steel with a<MET> 1.897 mm (14 gauge)</MET><ENG> 14 gauge</ENG> steel cover and shall 
be dust-proof.  Discharge spout and coal gate shall be furnished as indicated.  An approved type of supporting 
saddle shall be provided.  Supports shall be spaced at not more than<MET> 3 m</MET><ENG> 10 foot</ENG> intervals.  Motor enclosure 
shall be [totally enclosed, nonventilated] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled type suitable for installation in a 
Class II, Division 1, Group F hazardous location in conformance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>].  [Motor starter shall be [manual] 
[[magnetic] [across-the-line] [reduced voltage start]] type with [weather-resistant] [dust-tight] [explosion-proof] 
enclosure.] Dust controlling covers and inlet and discharge enclosures shall be provided for each conveyor.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.2   Belt Conveyor</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where motor starters for mechanical equipment are provided in motor control 
centers, delete the description of motor starters.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Belt conveyor shall be of the trough type, as shown.  Maximum incline of the belt conveyor shall not exceed 15 
degrees.  The conveyor support frame shall have sufficient rigidity to maintain belt alignment, at least<MET> 75 mm</MET><ENG>
 3 inches</ENG> clearance to prevent damage to the edge of the belt on its return run, and adjustments for aligning 
shafts.  Decking to protect the return belt from coal sifting and to provide lateral stiffness shall be placed 
on top of the stringers.  Idlers shall be accurately made to provide a rigid framework that will maintain permanent 
alignment of well-balanced, smooth-running, easy turning idler rolls.  Idlers and return rolls shall be <RID>CEMA Belt Book</RID>
.  Pressure lubrication shall be provided to ball or roller bearings.  Idlers shall be 20-degree or 35-degree 
three-roll type spaced on<MET> 1200 mm</MET><ENG> 4 foot</ENG> centers, except under loading points and skirts.  Return idlers shall 
be spaced on<MET> 3 m</MET><ENG> 10 foot</ENG> centers.  The belting shall be Grade 2 as defined in RMA Conveyor and Elevator Belt 
Technical Information.  The belting shall have field-vulcanized splices.  Pulleys shall be designed in accordance 
with <RID>CEMA B105.1</RID>, shall be heavy welded steel, true to diameter and accurately bored, key seated and tightly 
fitted to the shafts.  Pulley face width for belts<MET> 1.1 m</MET><ENG> 42 inches</ENG> wide and smaller, that are<MET> 150 m</MET><ENG> 500 feet</ENG> 
or more in length, shall be belt width plus<MET> 100 mm</MET><ENG> 4 inches</ENG>; less than<MET> 150 m</MET><ENG> 500 feet</ENG> in length, shall be belt 
width plus<MET> 75 mm</MET><ENG> 3 inches</ENG>.  Pulley face width for belts<MET> 1200 mm</MET><ENG> 48 inches</ENG> and larger shall be belt width plus<MET>
 150 mm</MET><ENG> 6 inches</ENG>.  Drive pulleys shall be provided with<MET> 19 mm</MET><ENG> 3/4 inch</ENG> thick vulcanized and grooved lagging.  
Snub pulleys shall be provided with<MET> 9.5 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 inch</ENG> vulcanized smooth lagging.  All conveyor pulley shaft assemblies 
shall be supported by two heavy-duty antifriction bearings having a minimum life expectancy of 50,000 hours for 
90 percent of bearings in accordance with <RID>ABMA 11</RID> for roller bearings.  The pulley diameter shall be sufficiently 
large to meet the requirements of the duck weight and ply of the belt to permit flexing of the belt around the 
pulley circumference without damaging the belt or shortening the belt life.  The conveyor shall be driven by 
a [totally enclosed, nonventilated type] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled type] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled type 
suitable for installation in Class II, Division 1, Group F hazardous location in conformance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>] electric 
motor connected to a drive-shaft-mounted speed reducer unit by a [roller chain drive] [V-belt drive] [flexible 
coupling].  [The motor starter shall be [manual] [[magnetic] [across-the-line] [reduced voltage start]] type 
with [general-purpose] [weather-resistant] [water-tight] [dust-tight] [explosion-proof] enclosure.]  Belt conveyors 
shall be provided with belt misalignment switches, emergency stop pull cords and pull switches, galvanized expanded 
metal shields over tail pulley, zero speed switches, loading skirts, plugged chute switches, walkways, supports, 
belt takeups, belt cleaners, skirt boards, and pulley scrapers.  Dust controlling covers and inlet and discharge 
enclosures shall be provided for each conveyor.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.3   Flight Conveyor</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where motor starters for mechanical equipment are provided in motor control 
centers, delete the description of motor starters.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>[Scraper] [Shoe-suspended] flight conveyor arranged generally as shown and of the single-strand type shall have 
capacity not less than [_____]<MET> metric tons/hour</MET><ENG> tons/hour</ENG> when handling coal with approximate weight of<MET> 800 kg/cubic 
meter</MET><ENG> 50 pcf</ENG> and with maximum lump size of [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> diameter.  Capacity shall be based on a maximum 
speed of<MET> 508 mm/sec</MET><ENG> 100 fpm</ENG> with conveyor operating up a [_____] degree incline.  Chain shall be drop-forged 
steel type with flights made of either steel or malleable-iron, spaced at least three times the largest lump 
size.  Foot shaft shall have protected screw takeup with adjustment of not less than<MET> 300 mm</MET><ENG> 12 inches</ENG>.  Trough 
shall be made of<MET> 4.8 mm</MET><ENG> 3/16 inch</ENG> steel plate, minimum.  All sliding surfaces in contact with the chain or flights 
shall be lined with<MET> 19 mm</MET><ENG> 3/4 inch</ENG> thick, removable, ultra high molecular weight polyethylene liners.  Both sides 
of trough shall be provided with a warning sign "DANGER - DO NOT WELD - FLAMMABLE PLASTIC LINER."  Signs shall 
be visible on each floor level and at frequent intervals.  Conveyor shall be provided with discharge openings 
as indicated, each of which shall be provided with rack-and-pinion-operated gates with handwheels.  Motor shall 
drive conveyor through a speed reduction unit which is either direct-connected or roller-chain-connected to the 
drive shaft.  Motor shall be [totally enclosed, nonventilated type] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled type] [totally 
enclosed, fan-cooled type suitable for installation in a Class II, Division 1, Group F hazardous location in 
accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>].  [Motor starter shall be [manual] [[magnetic] [across-the-line] [reduced voltage start]] 
type with [general-purpose] [weather-resistant] [water-tight] [dust-tight] [explosion-proof] enclosure.]  Conveyor 
frame shall be constructed essentially as indicated, with additional bracing as required for rigidity.  Dust 
controlling covers and inlet and discharge enclosures shall be provided for each conveyor.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.4   Bucket Elevators</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where motor starters for mechanical equipment are provided in motor control 
centers, delete the description of motor starters.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Vertical bucket elevators shall be furnished dust tight, complete with continuous chain and attached buckets, 
upper and lower sprockets, gears, shafts, bearings, casing with flanged connections including top hood and discharge 
spout, bottom boot, access doors, electric motor drive, and all accessories.  Bucket elevators shall be [vertical 
spaced centrifugal discharge] [positive discharge] [continuous bucket type].  The capacity of the elevator shall 
be not less than [_____]<MET> metric tons/hour</MET><ENG> tons/hour</ENG> when handling coal weighing approximately<MET> 800 kg/cubic meter</MET><ENG>
 50 pcf</ENG>.  Linear velocity shall be as indicated below:</TXT><BRK/>
<MET><TBL><THD><BRK/>
            Type of Bucket Elevator    Linear Velocity (meters per second)<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
             Centrifugal discharge                    1.1-1.6<BRK/>
             Continuous bucket                        0.51-0.69<BRK/>
             Positive discharge                       0.61 Max<BRK/></TBL>
</MET><ENG><TBL><THD><BRK/>
            Type of Bucket Elevator    Linear Velocity (fpm)<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
             Centrifugal discharge                    225-305<BRK/>
             Continuous bucket                        100-135<BRK/>
             Positive discharge                       120 Max<BRK/></TBL>
</ENG><BRK/>
<TXT>The head shaft and foot shaft shall be constructed of cold-rolled steel with the shaft diameters in accordance 
with manufacturer's standards.  Both shafts shall be mounted in roller bearings with forced-type lubricating 
fittings.  Foot shaft shall have screw takeup with adjustment of not less than<MET> 229 mm</MET><ENG> 9 inches</ENG>.  An automatic 
backstop shall be installed on the head shaft to prevent any backward motion of the chain.  Boot plates [, loading 
legs of continuous bucket elevator,] and bottom plate of stub discharge chute shall be<MET> 4.8 mm</MET><ENG> 3/16 inch</ENG> thick, 
minimum.  Other flat casing members shall be<MET> 2.657 mm (12 gauge)</MET><ENG> 12 gauge</ENG> steel thick, minimum.  Corner angles 
and stiffeners shall be provided to make the elevator self-supporting.  In addition, the elevator shall be tied 
to the adjoining structure at close enough spacing to increase the rigidity of the elevator.  The boot section 
shall be provided with clean-out doors, as well as front and back removable panels.  An inspection door large 
enough to remove a bucket from either run of the chain shall be provided in the intermediate section at operating 
level.  The elevator shall be driven by an electric motor installed in a suitable housing at the top of the flight.  
Motors shall be [totally enclosed, nonventilated] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled type] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled 
type suitable for installation in a Class II, Division 1, Group F hazardous location in accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>
].  [Motor starter shall be [manual] [[magnetic] [across-the-line] [reduced voltage start]] type with [general-purpose] 
[weather resistant] [water-tight] [dust-tight] [explosion-proof] enclosure.]  A platform shall be installed adjacent 
to the motor for servicing the motor and equipment mounted in the hood.  Access to the platform shall be by an 
approved type of safety ladder. Controls for the operation of the elevator shall be located as indicated. Dust 
control covers and inlet and discharge enclosures shall be provided for each conveyor.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.5   Vibrating Conveyor</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where motor starters for mechanical equipment are provided in motor control 
centers, delete the description of motor starters.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Vibrating conveyor shall be the electric-motor driven mechanical vibrating type with a capacity of [_____]<MET> metric 
tons/hour</MET><ENG> tons/hour</ENG> when handling coal weighing approximately<MET> 800 kg/cubic meters</MET><ENG> 50 pcf</ENG> and with maximum lump 
size of [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> in diameter.  Conveyor shall have a conveying length as shown.  The conveyor trough 
shall be fabricated of [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> gauge</ENG> steel, [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> in width and [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> deep [and provided 
with dust-tight cover].  Conveyor pans of<MET> 9.5 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 inch</ENG> thick, Type 304L solid stainless steel plate shall 
be provided.  The trough shall be mounted on vibrator bars, torsion bars, or coil springs attached to yoker legs 
of rigid cross brace construction and fabricated of corrosion-resistant material with hardened steel encased 
rubber bushings at articulation points.  The base shall be fabricated of steel channels or angles bolted directly 
to [building support] [concrete foundations].  The drive shall be through an eccentric shaft supported by a double 
row of self-aligning ball-or roller-bearing pillow blocks.  Positive action motion shall be imparted to the trough 
by a cast steel connecting rod attached to the trough by rubber-bushed wristpin and securely locked by taper 
lock bushings.  The conveyor shall be driven by a [totally enclosed, nonventilated type] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled 
type suitable for installation in Class II, Division 1, Group F hazardous location in accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>
] electric motor connected to the eccentric shaft by V-belt drive.  [The motor starter shall be [manual] [[magnetic] 
[across-the-line] [reduced voltage start]] type with [general-purpose] [weather-resistant] [water-tight] [dust-tight] 
[explosion-proof] enclosure.]</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.6   Gravimetric Weigh Feeder</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The weigh feeder shall be a metering belt type device designed to operate at a variable rate ranging from 10 
percent of maximum capacity to [_____]<MET> metric tons/hour</MET><ENG> tons/hour</ENG>.  Flow rate shall be automatic.  A silicon-controlled, 
rectifier dc drive shall automatically adjust the belt speed to maintain the rate of material flow, as set on 
the controller.  The weigh feeders shall meet or exceed the requirements of <RID>NIST HB 44</RID>, [Southern] [Eastern] 
[Western] Weighing and Inspection Bureau.  The weigh feeders shall have an accuracy of 1/2 of 1 percent of flow 
rates over their total variable rated capacity.  The feeder shall be provided with a flexible boot for connecting 
the gate to the feeder inlet chute which, in turn, shall be flared to produce a feed opening tapering from [_____] 
wide to [_____] wide with the direction of flow of material.  The belts for feeders shall conform to the <RID>RMA IP-1</RID>
, fire-resistant type conforming to the standards of <RID>30 CFR 1</RID> Schedule 28, Part 34 of the MSHA.  Top belt cover 
thickness shall be<MET> 6 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> with bottom cover<MET> 3 mm</MET><ENG> 1/8 inch</ENG> thick.  Belt edges shall have minimum<MET> 25 mm</MET><ENG> 
1 inch</ENG> flanges and shall be sealed by carrying the cover around the carcass edges during manufacture.  Cover 
and skim coat material shall be comparable to those meeting the requirements of <RID>RMA IP-1</RID>, Grade 2 for impact 
and abrasion resistance. The weight sensor shall be a heavy-duty, industrial, electronic force transducer flexure-mounted 
to the force collection system.  Each sensor shall have a remote indicating meter and a six-digit totalizing 
counter located, installed, and connected in the boiler control panel.  Unit frame shall provide rigid support 
for the material load, belt, and idlers.  The unit shall be shop assembled complete with drive and all appurtenances, 
and shall be dust-tight in operation.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.7   Track Hoppers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Track hoppers shall be standard double hopper design with a belt or vibrating-type feeder as indicated.  The 
hoppers shall have a capacity of approximately [_____]<MET> metric tons</MET><ENG> tons</ENG> and shall be constructed of not less 
than<MET> 9.5 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 inch</ENG> thick, Type 304L stainless steel plates, with slopes of not less than 55 degrees and shall 
be stiffened with angles.  The hoppers may also be of <RID>ASTM A 36/A 36M</RID> mild steel, minimum<MET> 6 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> thick 
with replaceable liners<MET> 6 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> thick, <RID>ASTM A 167</RID>, Type 304L, stainless steel.  All rivets and field bolts 
inside the hopper shall have flat heads.  The hopper shall be suspended from the track girders by heavy bolts 
and cast washers, or the sides shall be carried to the bottom of the track and supported by flanges fastened 
to concrete ledge continuously around the hopper with the concrete forming the top portion of hopper sides.  
Track girders shall consist of wide flange beams conforming to <RID>AREMA Eng Man</RID> for loading plus impact.  They shall 
be complete with bearing plates, WF cross struts, and rail clips.  Top of hopper shall be fitted with properly 
sized sections of grating made with steel bars sized [_____] by [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG>, and cross rods [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> 
inches</ENG> in diameter, to form openings [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> square.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.7.1   Rack-and-Pinion Gate</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A rack-and-pinion gate shall be provided at each hopper outlet and shall be a self-cleaning type.  [Hand] [Motor]-operated 
sliding plate shall be<MET> 9.5 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 inch</ENG> thick carbon steel, formed into the shape of a winged U.  The gate plate 
surface shall be completely protected by an overlapping liner of<MET> 3 mm</MET><ENG> 1/8 inch</ENG> thick, <RID>ASTM A 167</RID>, Type 304L stainless 
steel.  The gate body material, except for the dust cover, shall be of<MET> 4.8 mm</MET><ENG> 3/16 inch</ENG> thick <RID>ASTM A 167</RID>, Type 
304L stainless steel where in contact with coal flow.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.7.2   Vibrating or Belt Feeders</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where motor starters for mechanical equipment are provided in motor control 
centers, delete the description of motor starters.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The vibrating or belt feeders of manufacturer's standard design shall be provided for the service required.  
Motor shall be [totally enclosed, nonventilated] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled type] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled 
type suitable for installation in a Class II, Division 1, Group F hazardous location in accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>
].  [Motor starter shall be [manual] [[magnetic] [across-the-line] [reduced voltage start]] type with [weather-resistant] 
[dust-tight] [explosion-proof] enclosure.]</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.24.8   Truck Hoppers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Truck hoppers shall be of standard double hopper design with a belt or vibrating type feeder as indicated.  The 
hoppers shall have a capacity of approximately [_____]<MET> metric tons</MET><ENG> tons</ENG> and shall be constructed of<MET> 9.5 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 
inch</ENG> thick Type 304L stainless steel plates, minimum, with slopes of at least 55 degrees, and shall be stiffened 
with<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> angles, minimum.  The hopper may also be of <RID>ASTM A 36/A 36M</RID> mild steel, minimum<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 
inch</ENG> thick with replaceable liners<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> thick, <RID>ASTM A 167</RID>, Type 304L stainless steel.  Rivets and 
field bolts inside the hopper shall be flat-head type.  The hopper shall be supported by a flange fastened to 
the concrete ledge continuously around the hopper, with the concrete forming the top portion of hopper sides.  
Top of hopper shall be fitted with properly sized section of bar grating made with [_____] by [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inch</ENG>
 mild steel bars and [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inch</ENG> diameter cross rods to form openings [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> square.  A supporting 
beam not less than [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> deep, [_____]<MET> kg/meter</MET><ENG> pounds/foot</ENG>, in a wide flange member, shall be provided 
under the grating.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.8.1   Rack-and-Pinion Gate</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A rack-and-pinion gate shall be provided at each hopper outlet and shall be a self-cleaning type.  [Hand] [Motor]-operated 
sliding plate shall be<MET> 9.5 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 inch</ENG> thick carbon steel, formed into the shape of a winged U.  The gate plate 
surface shall be completely protected by an overlapping liner of<MET> 3.2 mm</MET><ENG> 1/8 inch</ENG> thick, <RID>ASTM A 167</RID>, Type 304L 
stainless steel.  The gate body material, except for the dust cover, shall be of<MET> 4.8 mm</MET><ENG> 3/16 inch</ENG> thick <RID>ASTM A 167</RID>
, Type 304L stainless steel where in contact with coal flow.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.8.2   Vibrating or Belt Feeders</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where motor starters for mechanical equipment are provided in motor control 
centers, delete the description of motor starters.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The vibrating or belt feeders complete with control of manufacturer's standard design for the service required 
shall be provided.  Motor shall be [totally enclosed, nonventilated] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled] [totally 
enclosed, fan-cooled type, suitable for installation in a Class II, Division 1, Group F hazardous location in 
accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>].  [Motor starter shall be [manual] [[magnetic] [across-the-line] [reduced voltage start]] 
type with [weather-resistant] [dust-tight] [explosion-proof] enclosure.]</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.24.9   Vibrator</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where motor starters for mechanical equipment are provided in motor control 
centers, delete the description of motor starters.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Vibrator shall be electromagnetic type with variable power control that produces mechanical pulsating motion.  
The net weight of the vibrator shall be [_____]<MET> kg</MET><ENG> pounds</ENG> and power input shall be [_____] watts, [_____] amperes 
at [_____] volts ac.  Vibrator shall provide 3600 vibrations per minute or 7200 vibrations for heavy duty applications.  
The vibrator shall be seminoiseless and shall be provided with mounting plates for welding to hoppers as indicated, 
each complete with an eye bolt for attaching a safety chain.  The electric control suitable for separate wall 
mounting shall be complete with an electronic valve for changing alternating current to mechanical pulsating 
waves and a dial switch or rheostat to vary the power of vibration.  Vibrators shall be provided with Division 
I, Class II, Group F rating in the areas where coal dust is present, in accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.10   Car Heaters</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  The designer will determine if electrical facilities are sufficient to 
provide the power requirements of electric car heaters or if gas-fired heaters 
must be used.  The designer will determine if the location and climatic conditions 
will require sidecar panels or undercar heaters, or a combination of both types 
of heaters.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.10.1   Gas-Fired Heaters</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Gas-fired heaters shall be the infrared radiant type and shall be located between rails and along the walls of 
the shed.  Heater shall have an input of approximately<MET> 90 kW</MET><ENG> 300,000 Btuh</ENG>.  Heater shall have perforated, heavy-gauge 
stainless steel cover that is not affected by water or coal falling from the car.  Burner shall have windproof 
pilot, main gas solenoid valve, and safety switch to interrupt gas supply to burner if pilot is not burning, 
and shall be furnished with manual cutoff valves and pressure regulator.  Heater shall be supplied with electric 
blower for furnishing combustion air to the burner and with all other controls and accessories as recommended 
by the heater manufacturer for a complete installation, and shall comply with <RID>CSA/AM Z83.19</RID> and <RID>UL 795</RID>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.10.2   Electric Infrared Radiant Heaters</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Electric infrared radiant heaters shall be weatherproof car thawing equipment with radiating surfaces of alloy 
tubing enclosing electrically insulated conductors.  Heaters shall be designed for hazardous area locations.  
The equipment shall be in modular lengths suitable for both<MET> 45 and 90 metric tons</MET><ENG> 50 and 100 ton</ENG> capacity cars 
and shall be designed for [manual] [automatic] disconnection of units not required during thawing operations.  
Car heaters shall include sidecar or undercar heating banks, or both, capable of operating as independent units 
designed for maintaining a balanced three-phase distribution system.  Heaters shall have heating conductor units, 
including factory assembled connections for attachment to water-tight terminal boxes, supported on corrosion-resistant 
metal framing and shall have rust-resistant steel reflectors with an approved coating.  Heaters and connections 
shall be wired using NEMA 4 enclosures, in accordance with <RID>NEMA ICS 1</RID>, suitable for cleaning by hosing down with 
water.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.24.11   Coal Spouts, Chutes, Inlet Boxes, and Outlet Hoppers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Coal spouts, chutes, inlet boxes, and outlet hoppers shall be constructed of <RID>ASTM A 36/A 36M</RID> steel members not 
lighter than<MET> 3.416 mm (10 gauge)</MET><ENG> 10 gauge</ENG>, adequately reinforced and braced with angle frames, and with all joints 
dust tight.  Slopes shall be as steep as possible, but not less than 55 degrees off horizontal.  Liners shall 
be stainless steel or ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene (UHMWP).  If UHMWP liners are used, each side 
of chute at each floor level shall be provided with a warning sign "DANGER - DO NOT WELD - FLAMMABLE PLASTIC 
LINER."  Impact liners shall also be used.  Access openings and inspection openings with cover plates shall be 
provided as indicated and required.  [Silo frames shall be constructed of heavy channel frames the full size 
of the silo opening and shall be provided with concealed steam pipe and coil around opening.]  [Outlet hoppers 
shall be provided with rack-and-pinion type gates and shall be lined with austenitic stainless steel [_____]<MET> 
mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> thick, conforming to <RID>ASTM A 167</RID>, Type 304L].  Rack-and-pinion gates shall be of the type specified 
for track hoppers.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.12   Car Spotter</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Car spotter shall be electric-motor driven having a capstan mounted vertically on a rigid housing that completely 
encloses the gears.  The gears shall include helical gears and worm gear; the helical gears shall be fabricated 
of high grade steel accurately finished and splash-lubricated, and the worm gear shall be fabricated of bronze.  
All of the mechanism shall be mounted on a steel base rigidly welded to maintain alignment.  The unit shall be 
coupled to, and driven by, a separate, [_____]<MET> W</MET><ENG> hp</ENG>, totally enclosed, nonventilated, hoist-type motor with a 
full-load speed of 1720 rpm.  The coupling shall be roller-chain flexible type enclosed in a revolving casing 
and protected by a heavy steel guard.  The unit shall have a starting pull of<MET> 23 kN</MET><ENG> 5000 pounds</ENG>, a running pull 
of<MET> 11 kN</MET><ENG> 2500 pounds</ENG>, and an average rope speed not in excess of<MET> 230 mm/sec</MET><ENG> 45 fpm</ENG>.  The unit shall be complete 
with [_____]<MET> m</MET><ENG> feet</ENG> of [<MET>32 mm</MET><ENG> 1-1/4 inch</ENG> diameter manila rope with a breaking strength of<MET> 60 kN</MET><ENG> 13,500 pounds</ENG>
, minimum,] [<MET>19 mm</MET><ENG> 3/4 inch</ENG> diameter marline-covered standard steel wire rope with a breaking strength of<MET> 170 
kN</MET><ENG> 37,600 pounds</ENG>, minimum,] and a steel car pulling hook with an allowable rope pull of<MET> 45 kN</MET><ENG> 10,000 pounds</ENG>, 
so fabricated as to be readily attachable to, and removable from, the car frames.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.13   Coal Bunkers</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Suspension coal bunkers of size and capacity indicated shall be constructed of <RID>ASTM A 36/A 36M</RID> steel plate, reinforced 
and braced as required, and installed dust-tight.  Bunkers shall be provided of a design optimized for coal flow, 
not susceptible to rat-holing or hangups.  Cylindrical or silo type bunkers to reduce stagnation shall be provided 
for each boiler, each with conical discharge hoppers and slopes not less than 70 degrees.  The outlet cone shall 
be manufactured of, or lined with, <RID>ASTM A 167</RID>, Type 304L stainless steel.  Bunkers shall be provided with rack 
and pinion type coal shutoff valves, self-cleaning, and dust tight.  Valve materials exposed to flowing coal 
shall be of corrosion resistant steel.  An emergency diverter shall be provided for emptying the bunker.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.14   Coal Storage Silos</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.14.1   Silo Walls</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Silo walls may be slip-formed, cast-in-place reinforced concrete, precast concrete, or other approved construction 
materials.  Concrete shall have a 28-day compressive strength in accordance with Section <SRF>03 31 00.00 10</SRF> CAST-IN-PLACE 
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.  Silo roof shall be reinforced concrete complete with<MET> 600 mm</MET><ENG> 24 inch</ENG> square, weatherproof, 
hinged access door.  Handrail and steel toe-board shall be provided all around roof of the silo.  Live storage 
shelf for the silo shall be reinforced concrete sloped not less than 60 degrees from horizontal and supported 
by steel beams corbelled from the inside walls of the silo.  Live storage outlet hopper to chute and feeders 
shall be built of not lighter than<MET> 9.5 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 inch</ENG> steel.  Silo reserve storage floor shall be reinforced concrete, 
sloped not less than 60 degrees and laid on well-tamped fill material.  Reclaim outlet hopper to the chute feeding 
the flight feeder shall be built of not lighter than<MET> 9.5 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 inch</ENG> steel.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.14.2   Concrete Stave Silo</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>In a concrete stave silo, the interior finish shall consist of a three-coat concrete parget.  A brush coat, scratch 
coat, and a finish trowel coat shall be applied, one after the other, to produce a smooth monolithic finish.  
The parget shall be worked into the vertical and horizontal grooves to permanently interlock the concrete staves.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.14.3   Exteriors of Stave And Concrete Silos</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The exteriors of stave and concrete silos shall be covered with a brush coat of gray cement.  This coating shall 
be applied over all hoops, lugs, and staves to produce a homogeneous finish.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.14.4   High- and Low-Level Switch</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A normal high-level and emergency high-level control switch shall be mounted at the top of the silo to shut off 
the feeding system when the silo is full of coal.  A low-level switch shall be furnished at the low level of 
the silo's live storage shelf, as indicated, to signal by light that coal is at a low level in the live storage 
compartment.  Switches shall also be furnished near the bottom of the silo, as indicated, to signal by light 
that coal is at a low level in the reserve storage compartment.  Switches shall be for Class II, Division 1, 
Group F hazardous location in accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.24.15   Coal Crusher</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where motor starters for mechanical equipment are provided in motor control 
centers, delete the description of motor starters.</NPR><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<NPR>The designer shall select the appropriate type of crusher, based on the throughput 
requirements and an economic analysis.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Coal crusher shall be [roll crusher] [hammermill] maximum lump size of [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG>.  Crusher shall have 
a minimum capacity of [_____]<MET> metric tons/hour</MET><ENG> tons/hour</ENG> when handling average size bituminous coal.  Housings 
shall be made of heavy castings or welded heavy steel plate.  Interior of the housing shall have replaceable 
liners, constructed of abrasion resistant steel.  Breaker plate, grates, rolling rings, swing hammers, and other 
parts of the unit subject to excessive wearing shall be replaceable.  Crusher shall have provisions to trap and 
reject hard foreign objects without damaging the crusher.  Shafts shall be forged, heat-treated alloy steel with 
bearings mounted in dust-tight housings.  Motor shall be [totally enclosed, nonventilated type] [totally enclosed, 
fan-cooled type] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled type suitable for installation in a Class II, Division 1, Group 
F hazardous location in accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>].  [Motor starter shall be [manual] [[magnetic] [across-the-line] 
[reduced voltage start]] type with [general-purpose] [weather-resistant] [water-tight] [dust-tight] [explosion-proof] 
enclosure.]</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.16   Vibrating Feeders</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Vibrating feeders shall be the [electro-magnetic] [electro-mechanical] [single input (Brute Force)] type with 
a capacity of 0 to [_____]<MET> metric tons/hour</MET><ENG> tons/hour</ENG> when handling coal weighing approximately<MET> 800 kg/cubic 
meter</MET><ENG> 50 pcf</ENG> and with maximum lump size of [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> in diameter.  Feeder pans and skirts shall be of 
replaceable<MET> [6.4] [9.5] [12.7] mm</MET><ENG> [1/4] [3/8] [1/2] inch</ENG> thick, Type 304 solid stainless steel plate without 
liners.  The feeder pan shall be fabricated [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> in width, [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> in length, and [_____]<MET>
 mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> deep.  Dust control covers of<MET> 3.416 mm (No. 10 gauge)</MET><ENG> No. 10 gauge</ENG> thick steel shall be provided for 
each unit.  [Two] [Four] rectangular poke holes ([one] [two] each side) shall be provided with<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG>
 thick Type 304L stainless steel sliding covers.  All feeder parts coming in contact with coal shall be made 
of, or lined with, Type 304 stainless steel.  All feeders shall automatically compensate for material headloads 
and weight effect to maintain a constant feed and must not damper out when operating under full silos or bins.  
Slopes on pan shall not exceed 10 degrees.  The vibratory feeders shall be [foot] [suspension] mounted and shall 
be completed with supports.  Suspended feeders shall be provided with safety cables.  The feeders shall have 
their drives located [above] [below] trough.  The motors shall be [totally enclosed, nonventilated type] [totally 
enclosed, fan-cooled type suitable for installation in Class II, Division I, Group F hazardous location in accordance 
with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>].</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.17   Tripper</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The tripper shall be of steel construction, motor propelled, automatically reversible, or manually controlled.  
The tripper shall be equipped with antifriction bearings throughout, rolled or forged steel wheels, hand-operated 
rail clamps for optional operation in a fixed location, scraper, and crossover walk with handrail.  The traversing 
speed shall not exceed<MET> 127 mm/second</MET><ENG> 25 fpm</ENG>, and the motor shall include a motor brake.  The chute shall be one 
way toward the center of the silo and shall slope at not less than 55 degrees.  Its seal shall be provided with 
all necessary components for installation to suit the bunker/silo slot.  Seal shall be of the plow type.  The 
tripper shall be provided with [_____]<MET> W</MET><ENG> hp</ENG> motor, all reversing and end travel limit switches, cable reel, and 
14 No. 12 AWG conductor cable (13 slip rings) and supports for the starter.  Two push-button stations shall be 
mounted, one on each side of the tripper.  Both stations shall include forward-reverse and tripper stop-run push 
buttons.  The conveyor frame shall include a ladder type cable tray to contain the cable from the reel.  Reversing 
switches shall be mounted on the tripper and be actuated by track dogs to permit reversal of the tripper over 
each extreme silo.  Limit switches shall be mounted on the tripper to operate immediately beyond both extreme 
limits of tripper reversal.  A plugged chute switch shall also be furnished.  All tripper controls, including 
limit switches and reversing switches, shall be furnished in explosion-proof enclosures approved for Class II, 
Division 1, Group F service, in accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>.  The complete tripper shall also include pulley assemblies, 
shafts, bearings, carrying and return idlers, tripper framing and supports.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.18   Trackmobile</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Trackmobile shall be provided with a [_____]<MET> liter</MET><ENG> cubic inch</ENG> industrial gasoline engine for moving/switching 
[_____] rail cars on the track and hauling carts and other portable vehicles while traveling on its road wheels.  
The trackmobile shall be designed to ride on [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inch</ENG> gauge track.  Rail wheels shall be, heat treated, 
cast steel, keyed on tapered axles, solidly mounted suspension system.  Road wheels shall be, heavy duty, [_____] 
ply, [_____] by [_____] tires, roller-bearing mounted wheels, with retractable suspension.  The coupler shall 
be heavy-duty, cast steel, remotely controlled from cab.  Maximum speed shall be provided on rail<MET> (km/hour)</MET><ENG> (mph)</ENG>
 low [_____], high [_____]; on road, low [_____], high [_____].  The trackmobile shall be able to operate on 
a maximum grade of [_____] percent and minimum curve of [_____] foot radius.  Trackmobile shall be also equipped 
with [air brakes] [self-energizing drum and shoe type, hydraulic service], cab heater and defroster, sanders, 
[electric horn] [air horn] strobe light, front and rear lights, back-up alarm, [enclosed cab] [open cab] with 
windshield wipers [,radio remote control,] and power steering.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.24.19   En-Masse Chain Conveyors</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>These conveyors move materials horizontally and/or vertically, with multiple discharge points and in a dust-tight 
and completely enclosed unit.  Conveyors shall have a length as shown but not to exceed<MET> 75 m</MET><ENG> 250 feet</ENG>.  Conveyor 
capacity shall be [_____]<MET> metric tons/hour</MET><ENG> tons/hour</ENG> when handling coal with approximate weight of<MET> 800 kg/cubic 
meter</MET><ENG> 50 pcf</ENG> and with maximum lump size of [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> diameter.  Maximum capacity shall be based on a 
chain speed not to exceed<MET> 800 mm/sec</MET><ENG> 160 fpm</ENG>.  Chain shall be drop-forged, case hardened, steel alloy of the 
single-strand type with flights welded to the chain links, or integral chain and flights type.  The hardness 
of the links shall be 500-600 BHN.  The conveyor casing shall be dust tight and shall be of<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> thick <RID>
ASTM A 242/A 242M</RID> high strength, low alloy steel with<MET> 3.416 mm (No.  10 gauge)</MET><ENG> No. 10 gauge</ENG> cover of the same 
material.  The casing shall be provided with T-1 steel (<RID>ASTM A 514/A 514M</RID>, Type B) removable liners.  The liners 
shall be<MET> 19 mm</MET><ENG> 3/4 inch</ENG> thick on the bottom, and<MET> 13 mm</MET><ENG> 1/2 inch</ENG> thick on the sides, <MET>19 mm</MET><ENG> 3/4 inch</ENG> T-1 steel 
wear bars shall be provided for the empty run of the conveyor.  Liners and wear bars shall be attached to the 
casing using countersunk stainless steel bolts with stainless steel nuts and washers.  Drive sprocket shall be 
heat treated, induction hardened to a minimum depth of<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG>.  Drive shaft shall be heat treated, designed 
and sized based on <MET><RID>AGMA 6113</RID></MET><ENG><RID>AGMA 6013</RID></ENG> requirements.  Bearings shall be spherical double roller bearings.  A dust 
seal shall be provided where the drive shaft ends go through the casing.  The conveyor shall have inlet and outlet 
spouts, inspection doors giving access to the drive sprocket, cleaner and wear surfaces.  Chain tension is achieved 
by a screw take-up.  Each discharge opening shall be provided with rack-and-pinion-operated gates with [handwheels] 
[motor operated] [air operated].  Motor shall drive conveyor through a speed reduction unit which is either direct-connected 
or roller-chain-connected to the drive shaft.  Motor shall be [totally enclosed, nonventilated type] [totally 
enclosed, fan-cooled type] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled] type suitable for installation in a Class II, Division 
1, Group F Hazardous location in accordance with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>.  [Motor starter shall be [manual] [[magnetic] [across-the-line] 
[reduced voltage start]] type with [general-purpose] [weather-resistant] [water-tight] [dust-tight] [explosion-proof] 
enclosure.]  Conveyor frame shall be constructed essentially as indicated, with supports and additional bracing 
as required for rigidity.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.25   ASH HANDLING SYSTEM</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.25.1   Boiler Room Ash Handling System</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  When specifying boilers with capacity of 4.1 MW (14 million Btuh) or 
less per boiler, paragraph Ash Hopper and subsequent paragraphs will be deleted, 
except applicable portions of paragraph Ash Silo through paragraph Rotary, Dustless 
Unloader will be retained.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The ash handling system shall be the dry pneumatic type in stoker fired boilers.  This system shall gather ash 
from the boiler forward ash discharge grate hopper and from [economizer] [air preheater] ash discharge hopper 
and other filtration systems and shall discharge to the ash storage silo located outside of the building.  The 
entire system shall be coordinated to fit the equipment supplied.  Ash dust control conditioners shall be used 
to reduce fugitive dust emissions during discharge of ash from the storage silo.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>2.25.1.1   Ash Hopper</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Ash removal hopper for each boiler shall be constructed of<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> thick steel plate, minimum, with suitable 
external structural steel supports for connection to boiler ash hopper and necessary internal anchors for holding 
refractory lining in place.  Refractory lining shall be<MET> 225 mm</MET><ENG> 9 inches</ENG> thick on vertical walls and<MET> 150 mm</MET><ENG> 6 
inches</ENG> thick on feed plates.  Each hopper shall be furnished with a sliding ash gate.  Each boiler sliding gate 
unit shall be provided with an access compartment to allow gathering and cooling of ash.  A cast-iron grate shall 
be provided along with a manually-operated air-tight inlet valve for feeding ash into the pneumatic gathering 
line.  A hinged, steel access gate shall be provided at each compartment.  Spring loaded air intakes shall be 
provided at the end of each header.  The structural integrity of the hopper shall be based on the ash weight 
of<MET> 1120 kg/cubic m</MET><ENG> 70 pcf</ENG>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.25.1.2   Clinker Grinder</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Delete this paragraph if coal analysis indicates no possibility of slag 
formation.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Clinker grinder unit shall be provided with [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inch</ENG> wide double roll for each hopper outlet gate housing.  
The grinders shall have manganese steel rolls and cast-iron housings with grinder shafts mounted on outboard 
bearings protected by a stuffing box and gland assembly.  Grinder shafts shall pass through stuffing boxes equipped 
with packing rings and lantern rings for seal water flow.  Clinker grinder shall be provided with a reversing 
mechanism to reverse direction of the grinder rolls should an obstruction stall the grinder.  A<MET> 9.5 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 inch</ENG>
 steel plate ejector feed hopper shall be furnished below each clinker grinder to feed the inlet of the pneumatic 
ash gathering system.  Fixed passages in the clinker grinders shall prevent discharge of particles too large 
to be handled by the pneumatic conveying system.  Each clinker grinder shall be driven by a totally enclosed 
type motor and shall be provided with a reversing starter, pressure switch for seal water control, diaphragm-operated 
seal water valve, and a solenoid valve.  Units shall be designed for the characteristics of the coal specified 
and shall be capable of handling bottom ash at a rate exceeding the conveying system capacity.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.25.1.3   Conveyor Piping</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Conveyor pipe and fittings shall be made of an abrasive-resisting alloy metal cast by the sand-spun process, 
having a minimum Brinell hardness of 280.  Wall thickness shall not be less than<MET> 13 mm</MET><ENG> 1/2 inch</ENG> and pipe lengths 
shall not exceed<MET> 5.5 m</MET><ENG> 18 feet</ENG>.  Joints shall be made with flanges or sleeve pipe couplings and shall be air-tight.  
Fittings shall have a Brinell hardness number of approximately 400 and shall be provided with removable wearbacks, 
where applicable, or shall be of the integral wearback type.  Ash inlet fittings shall be designed so that the 
ash cannot overload or clog the conveyor pipeline.  Suitable adjustable supports or hangers shall be provided.  
Vacuum hose connections shall be provided as indicated.  Provide<MET> 4.6 m</MET><ENG> 15 foot</ENG> lengths of vacuum hose with quick 
connectors and four floor sweep-up nozzles.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.25.1.4   Vacuum and Combination Vacuum/Pressure Systems</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Vacuum System:  The ash conveying equipment shall be pneumatic suction type, complete with vacuum 
pumps and all component parts necessary for complete and successful operation.  The ash conveying equipment 
shall be sized approximately twice the predicted accumulation rate.  The system shall have the capacity 
to convey and empty not less than [_____]<MET> metric tons/hour</MET><ENG> tons/hour</ENG> of ash weighing approximately [_____]<MET>
 kg/cubic meter</MET><ENG> pcf</ENG>.  The tonnage shall be based on average handling rate and not on the instantaneous 
rate.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Combination Vacuum/Pressure Systems:  Vacuum/pressure equipment shall be commercially produced for 
this particular type of service and shall include a pressure vessel equipped with a filter section at 
the top and an aeration ring at the bottom.  Material shall be drawn into the unit by vacuum, with the 
air separated from the material in the top filter section and exhausted through a silencer.  A high level 
indicator within the vessel shall then reverse the action of the vacuum/pressure pump by aspirating air 
through a silencer and filter unit and discharging the pressurized air into the vessel.  Part of the 
air shall be utilized to clean the filter and part of the air shall pass through the aeration ring of 
the vessel to pick up material and convey it under pressure to the storage silo.  The unit shall be furnished 
complete with all automatic air control valves to control air flow to and from the vessel continuously 
through the two modes of the operating cycle.  Unit operation shall continue automatically until switched 
off at the control cabinet.  All automatic valves, interconnecting piping, and the vacuum/pressure vessel 
shall be skid-mounted.  Vacuum/pressure pump shall be mounted separately.  The control cabinet may be 
mounted separately or skid-mounted on the vacuum/pressure vessel skid.  Capacity of the unit shall be 
approximately [_____]<MET> metric tons/hour</MET><ENG> tons/hour</ENG> of ash weighing approximately [_____]<MET> kg/cubic meter</MET><ENG>
 pcf</ENG>.  Piping sizes for ash collection system shall be designed to fit the unit supplied.  The vacuum/pressure 
system shall be used where storage silo is more than<MET> 150 m</MET><ENG> 500 feet</ENG> from the boiler plant.  A vacuum 
system should be used for capacities of less than<MET> 45 metric tons/hour</MET><ENG> 50 tons/hour</ENG> per system.</LST><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where characteristics of the fly ash require additional treatment, a 
water spray shall be incorporated in the filtering unit.  If not required, the 
portion included in the brackets shall be deleted.  Air discharged to the atmosphere 
must meet the local air pollution standards.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Pump Unit:  Vacuum or vacuum/pressure pump unit shall be sized to match system design requirements.  
Pump unit shall be liquid-ring type having round rotor with curved blades rotating in an elliptical casing.  
Water alternately entering and leaving the chambers within the rotor vanes shall provide the required 
pumping action.  Water within the casing shall act as an air cleansing agent and the operation and maintenance 
of the unit shall not be affected by dust-laden air.  Unit shall be base-mounted with electric motor 
drive and all required heat exchangers, separators, and control valves.  The vacuum pump inlet piping 
shall be provided with a vacuum filter unit to remove the fly ash obtained from the economizer ash hopper.  
The filter unit shall include a metal housing containing filter bags and an automatic air purge back-washing 
system.  [A water spray shall be incorporated into the filtering unit.]  The filtering unit shall remove 
all fly ash before discharge to the atmosphere.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>d.  Control Cabinet:  Control cabinet for the complete operation of the system shall be supplied and 
shall include all running indicating lights as required.  A push-button switch shall be conveniently 
located in the boiler house to start and stop the system.  A vacuum breaker, operating automatically 
from a timer, shall be provided in the bottom ash conveyor line to break the system vacuum.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>e.  Controls:  Controls for a combination vacuum/pressure system shall have a selector switch set to 
automatic position to start the unit in the vacuum cycle.  High-level indicator in vacuum/pressure vessel 
shall actuate necessary controls to cut off the vacuum gathering system and pressurize the vessel for 
pressure discharge of collected material.  A low-pressure switch in the control panel shall sense the 
pressure drop in conveying pressure and shall return the unit to vacuum operation.  The unit shall operate 
continuously in this manner until manually shut down.  Setting selector switch in manual position shall 
shut the unit down after filling.  Discharge shall then be accomplished by pressing the manual discharge 
button.  A high vacuum switch with time delay shall be provided to shut the system down automatically 
in the event none of the inlet valves are actuated.  Switches and controls shall be heavy-duty type in 
accordance with <RID>NEMA ICS 1</RID>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>f.  Automatic Air Valve:  Automatic air valve shall be provided at economizer or air preheater ash inlet 
hopper discharge slide gate to allow air into system without causing a vacuum within the boiler ash hopper.  
Slide gate shall be provided as part of the ash system and shall be manually-operated and interlocked 
to actuate the automatic air inlet valve.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.25.1.5   Ash Silo</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The ash storage silo shall have a capacity of not less than [_____]<MET> metric tons</MET><ENG> tons</ENG> of ash and fly ash considered 
to have an average weight of [_____]<MET> kg/cubic meter</MET><ENG> pcf</ENG>.  This capacity shall be based on a minimum of 24 hours 
[60 hours if ash cannot be removed on weekends].  The silo shall be made of welded steel with a cone bottom for 
truck filling and shall be supported on a structural steel tower.  All elements exposed to the exterior shall 
be designed for wind loads of [_____]<MET> kg/square meter</MET><ENG> psf</ENG>.  A<MET> 4.3 m</MET><ENG> 14 foot</ENG> clearance shall be provided under 
the hopper outlet fitting or appurtenance.  Silo shall be provided with steel ladder and safety cage from the 
ground level to roof, steel ladder inside storage bin, and an angle railing around the roof perimeter.  Minimum 
plate thickness shall be<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG>.  Silo shall be complete with all accessories required for an operable 
installation including, but not limited to, high ash level detector, roof manhole, pressure and relief valve, 
and other roof openings, as necessary.  Interior coating shall be coal-tar epoxy conforming to <RID>SSPC Paint 16</RID>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Ash Storage Silo:  Ash storage silo for vacuum system shall be provided with two stage separators 
[and a tertiary bag filter].  The primary receiver shall be cylindrical and shall be constructed entirely 
of sectional steel or cast plates suitable for this special service.  The receiver shall be not less 
than<MET> 900 mm</MET><ENG> 3 feet</ENG>in diameter.  Flanges and bolts shall be on the outside, and the impact of ash shall 
be directed against heavy iron wear plates of abrasive-resistant alloy.  The receiver shall be provided 
with an air-tight discharge passage not less than<MET> 450 mm</MET><ENG> 18 inches</ENG> in diameter for free flow of clinkers.  
The receiver shall have means for positive, periodic, and automatic operation in dumping its entire contents 
into the silo; in addition, the system shall be so designed that all suction is positively shut off from 
the receiver during its dumping period so that no dust can be sucked out through the exhaust while the 
discharge of the receiver is open or opening.  The air from the primary receiver shall enter an external 
secondary separator which shall remove 90 percent of the dust not collected by the primary receiver.  
The combined efficiency of the primary and external secondary separators [and tertiary bag filter] shall 
be not less than 98 percent.  The secondary separator shall be similar to the primary receiver in construction 
but may be smaller and of lighter material.  No part of the discharger shall extend into the main storage 
bin.  A housing constructed of<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> steel plate with a tight-closing access door shall be 
provided as an enclosure for the discharger.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Silo Vent Filter:  The silo vent filter unit shall be mounted on top of the silo and shall act as 
an air release unit to separate the air from the ash.  The ash shall drop into the silo.  Back cleaning 
of the bag filters shall be automatic, utilizing plant air at approximately<MET> 690 to 860 kPa</MET><ENG> 100 to 125 
psig</ENG>.  Back cleaning unit shall be actuated whenever the ash handling system is in use.  Dust released 
from the filter bags in the back cleaning operation shall fall into the storage silo.  Housing shall 
be provided to allow the unit to operate exposed to the weather in ambient temperatures ranging from<MET> 
-40 degrees C to plus 55 degrees C</MET><ENG> -40 to plus 130 degrees F</ENG>.</LST><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where motor starters for mechanical equipment are provided in motor control 
centers, delete the description of motor starters.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Rotary, Dustless Unloader:  A rotary, dustless unloader shall be provided to eliminate all dust in 
unloading ash and dust from the ash storage silo.  No water shall be added to the ashes in the conveyor 
or in the storage bin.  The dustless unloader shall add water to the ash in controlled quantities so 
that no surplus water runs or drips from the ash after discharge.  The discharged ash shall be muddy 
but loose and free flowing.  Water valve shall open only when drive motor is running.  Unloader shall 
have a capacity of not less than<MET> 27 metric tons</MET><ENG> 30 tons</ENG> of conditioned ash per hour.  The rotating unit 
shall be designed so that all bearings are located on the outside and not in contact with the material 
handled.  Platform shall be provided for access to unit and shall have a handrail and a safety ladder 
to grade.  Motor shall be totally enclosed type for outdoor operation.  [Motor starter shall be [manual] 
[[magnetic] [across-the-line] [reduced voltage start]] type with [weather-resistant] [water-tight] [dust-tight] 
enclosure.]</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.25.1.6   Conveyor Type Ash Handling System</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  When specifying boilers with capacity greater than 4.1 MW (14 million 
Btuh) per boiler, this paragraph through paragraph Elevator Conveyor will be 
deleted.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Ash pits shall be funnel shaped, constructed of<MET> 6.4 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 inch</ENG> steel plate, minimum, and covered with a heavy 
grating with openings approximately<MET> 50 mm</MET><ENG> 2 inches</ENG> square.  Ashes and clinkers shall be discharged from the boiler 
ash hoppers into ash pits located directly below the ash hopper doors.  A combination drag chain conveyor for 
horizontal conveying and an elevator conveyor for vertical conveying of ashes shall be arranged, as indicated, 
to take ashes from the bottom of the ash pits for discharge into the ash silo.  Conveyors shall have a capacity 
of not less than [_____]<MET> metric tons/hour</MET><ENG> tons/hour</ENG> when handling ashes weighing approximately [_____]<MET> kg/m</MET><ENG> pcf</ENG>
 at a maximum speed of<MET> 508 mm/second</MET><ENG> 100 fpm</ENG>.  Doors shall be provided for access to all parts, as required.  
Motor shall be [totally enclosed, nonventilated type] [totally enclosed, fan-cooled type] [totally enclosed, 
fan-cooled type suitable for installation in a Class II, Division 1, Group F hazardous location in accordance 
with <RID>NFPA 70</RID>].  [Motor starter shall be [manual] [[magnetic] [across-the-line] [reduced voltage start]] type 
with [general-purpose] [weather-resistant] [water-tight] [dust-tight] [explosion-proof] enclosure.]</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Drag Chain Conveyor:  Drag chain conveyor shall be of a single strand of wide, heat treated, high 
alloy, drop forged rivetless drag chain with a [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inch</ENG> pitch, [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inch</ENG> overall width, 
and [_____]<MET> kg</MET><ENG> pounds</ENG> working strength, and shall have a hardness of 460-510 Brinell.  The upper strand 
of the chain shall convey the ash in a trough constructed of<MET> 9.5 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 inch</ENG> cast-iron extending from 
[_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> in front of the foot shaft to [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> behind the head shaft and set flush 
with the floor.  The return strand of chain shall be carried in angle runways set flush with the trench 
floor.  The drag chain conveyor shall be driven by a [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inch</ENG> pitch roller chain and [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG>
 inch</ENG> pitch diameter, [_____] tooth sprocket on the drive shaft, and a [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inch</ENG> pitch diameter, 
[_____] -tooth sprocket on the elevator foot shaft.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Elevator Conveyor:  Elevator conveyor shall be a single strand chain positive discharge type with 
head and takeup.  The casing shall be constructed of<MET> 2.657 mm (12 gauge)</MET><ENG> 12 gauge</ENG> steel, minimum, with<MET>
 9.5 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 inch</ENG> thick boot plates.  The head-end drive shall include a gear motor and steel roller chain 
complete with drive brackets, guards, and backstop.  The elevator shall be equipped with head-end platform 
and ladder.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>2.25.2   Ash Handling Controls</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The ash handling system control panel shall contain all necessary instrumentation, including selector switches, 
annunciators, push buttons, and ammeters required for monitoring and operation of the ash handling system.  The 
panel shall graphically display the system.  In addition, the panel shall contain all necessary timers, relays, 
and terminal blocks that are required for the control system.  Control and monitoring of the ash removal system 
shall be from a single panel.  This panel shall have pushbuttons to start automatic operation of each system 
and also pushbuttons for individual control of each component.  The panel shall have sufficient instrumentation 
to observe the removal operations and controls to permit effective emergency control.  Local control stations 
at each ash removal point for local manual operation shall also be provided.  Local selector switches shall be 
provided so that equipment may be operated manually for test and maintenance purposes.  The operation of the 
bottom ash system shall be controlled by a microprocessor-based control system, a solid-state programmable controller, 
or an electro-mechanical system.  Controls and instrumentation for location indoors shall have NEMA 12 rating, 
in accordance with <RID>NEMA ICS 1</RID>.  All outdoor components shall have NEMA 4 rating, in accordance with <RID>NEMA ICS 1</RID>
.  Major equipment components, including control panels and devices, shall be factory-mounted, prewired, tubed, 
and tested to the maximum practical extent.  The system shall include controls for fully automatic and sequential 
operation of the ash handling system.  These controls shall be designed so that manual steps, such as continuous 
monitoring and regulation will not be required.  Suitable safety interlocks shall be incorporated to assure that 
proper permissive conditions have been met prior to changing the operating status of major system components.  
Shutdown of the ash handling system, or portion thereof, shall be automatically initiated, with alarms, should 
unsafe conditions arise during operation of the system.  Facilities for monitoring and control of the ash handling 
system shall be provided for the following functions:</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Manual start of the automatic control operations.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Selection of operating components.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Override of the automatic control sequences, both at the ash handling control panel and locally.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>d.  Manual operation, either remotely from the control center or locally.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>e.  Emergency shutdown on a unit or system basis.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>f.  Status monitoring at the ash handling control panel of the operation of the ash handling system and 
its components.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The automatic controls for bottom ash collection transport shall operate as specified.  When a start command 
has been manually initiated, the automatic ash collection and transport sequences for the unit shall progress 
through their complete cycles, and after completion of the cycles, the system shall automatically shut down.  
The system shall include an annunciator system, complete with audio and visual alarms, as part of the ash handling 
control panel.  The annunciator system shall receive inputs from devices and system logic which shall indicate 
any out-of-specification or trip condition. Recorders shall be furnished to provide a permanent record of selected 
variables that relate to the ash handling system's performance and operation.  Control stations supplied with 
analog control loops shall provide bumpless transfer between the manual and automatic modes of operation.  The 
manual mode of operation shall provide direct control of the end device with no intervening analog control components 
unless those components are powered by the same source as the end device.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.25.3   Submerged Drag Chain Conveyor (SDCC)</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Submerged drag chain conveyor shall be designed to extract ash at normal capacity [_____]<MET> metric tons/hour</MET><ENG> TPH</ENG>
 and maximum capacity [_____]<MET> metric tons/hour</MET><ENG> TPH</ENG>, based on a dry ash density of approximately [_____]<MET> kg/cubic 
meter</MET><ENG> pcf</ENG>.  The maximum chain speed shall be<MET> 76 mm/sec</MET><ENG> 15 fpm</ENG>.  The SDCC shall be designed for continuous operation 
and shall have a storage capacity of [_____]<MET> cubic meters</MET><ENG> cubic feet</ENG> accumulation.  The SDCC shall have an upper 
compartment filled with water and a dry lower compartment.  The equipment shall be provided to maintain water 
temperature at approximately<MET> 60 degrees C</MET><ENG> 140 degrees F</ENG>.  The dewatering slope shall be at an angle of [_____] 
degrees with the horizontal.  The top trough shall be not less than<MET> 9.5 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 inch</ENG> thick carbon steel plate, 
welded construction, lined with renewable abrasion resistant steel wear plates, with a minimum thickness of<MET> 13 
mm</MET><ENG> 1/2 inch</ENG> and 380 BHN.  All welds shall be ground smooth.  The necessary track guide angles, hold-down angles, 
and carbon steel chain protectors shall be provided.  The minimum depth of water in the upper trough shall be 
[_____]<MET> meters</MET><ENG> feet</ENG>.  The return chain bottom trough shall be dry, constructed of<MET> 9.5 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 inch</ENG> thick steel 
plate, stiffened and braced with structural shapes and shall be water-tight.  Chain track angles shall be provided 
with a minimum<MET> 13 mm</MET><ENG> 1/2 inch</ENG> thick steel replaceable wear flats with a minimum 300 BHN.  Wear strips shall be 
also provided under the return flights, minimum<MET> 13 mm</MET><ENG> 1/2 inch</ENG> thick and<MET> 50 mm</MET><ENG> 2 inches</ENG> wide.  The conveyor chain 
shall be a double strand round-link or ship-type chain, case hardened, corrosion and abrasion resistant, chrome-nickle-alloy, 
annealed and carburized with surface hardness between 500-630 BHN.  Design strength and pitch shall be based 
on operating conditions.  The conveyor flights shall be [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> deep by [_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> thick T-1 
steel plates attached on both ends to the chain.  The flight shall be provided with top wear pads and bottom 
wear strips of abrasion resistant steel plate of 300 BHN minimum.  A chain tensioner shall be provided at the 
tail end of SDCC for maintaining proper tension in both strands of the chain.  The assembly shall include cast-iron 
idler wheel, bearings, shaft, guide block and bearing housing.  Idler assemblies for both troughs shall include 
heavy duty spherical roller type bearings with external lubrication fittings.  The chain drive assembly shall 
include cast iron wheels with removable, surface hardened, toothed segments, drive shaft, bearings.  The conveyor 
shall be driven by a hydrostatic drive unit coupled with a low speed, high torque hydraulic motor, built-in torque 
limiting valves for preventing damage to load train or electric motor.  Speed regulation, self-lubrication, internal 
cooling, and dynamic braking shall be provided with this drive.  Inching capability shall be provided.  Hinged 
inspection doors, windows, and removable panels shall be provided along the conveyor to permit access and observation 
at critical points.  Inspection doors, windows, and removable panels in mild steel shall be provided with stainless 
steel hardware and must be made completely water-tight.  Water cooling and drainage connections shall be provided 
through flanged connections to the conveyor trough.  Provision shall be made for continuous water flow into the 
top trough of the conveyor including two overflow connections, one for normal level and one high level, including 
high level alarm and an overflow weir box to prevent drain clogging.  Chain cleaning sprays shall also be provided.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.25.4   Dense Phase Ash Handling</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The ash conveying system shall be pneumatic dense phase type, complete with transfer vessels, solenoid valves, 
air receiver tank, air producer and ash conveying piping.  The ash handling system shall be designed to handle 
[_____]<MET> metric tons/hour</MET><ENG> tons/hour</ENG> of ash weighing approximately [_____]<MET> kg/cubic meter</MET><ENG> pcf</ENG>.  Each transport 
vessel shall be bolted to the hopper discharge flange where ash shall flow into vessel by gravity until a level 
indicator indicates the vessel is full.  The transport vessel inlet valve then closes, and transport air between<MET>
 170 to 345 kPa</MET><ENG> 25 to 50 psi</ENG> enters the vessel through a fluidizing unit located at the bottom of the vessel.  
When the vessel has been brought to transport air pressure, the transport line valve opens and a "slug" of fly 
ash is transported to the storage silo.  The transporting pipe shall be Schedule 40 standard black iron pipe 
[_____]<MET> mm</MET><ENG> inches</ENG> diameter.  The material velocities in the transportation pipe shall be [_____]<MET> meters/sec</MET><ENG> fpm</ENG>
.  The system shall be provided with<MET> 210 to 415 kPa</MET><ENG> 30 to 60 psi</ENG> compressed air to fluidize the transmit ash.  
The conveying velocity shall not exceed<MET> 5 meters/sec</MET><ENG> 1000 fpm</ENG>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>2.25.5   Fly Ash Collectors</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Fly ash collectors shall be as specified in Section <SRF>44 10 00</SRF> AIR POLLUTION CONTROL.  Fly ash collectors shall 
be sized to handle total flue gas at maximum boiler load and stack temperature, and shall be provided along with 
induced draft equipment.  Fly ash collector requirements shall be coordinated with boiler draft and control requirements.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT></PRT><PRT><TTL>PART 3   EXECUTION</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.1   EXAMINATION</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting 
Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.2   ERECTION OF BOILER AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Boiler and auxiliary equipment shall be installed as indicated and in accordance with <SUB>manufacturers' instructions</SUB>
.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.3   EARTHWORK</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Excavation and backfilling for tanks and piping shall be as specified in Section <SRF>31 00 00</SRF> EARTHWORK, except backfill 
for fiberglass reinforced fuel tanks shall conform to the manufacturer's installation instructions.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.4   STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Storage tank installation shall be in accordance with Section <SRF>33 56 10</SRF> FACTORY-FABRICATED FUEL STORAGE TANKS.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.5   PIPING INSTALLATION</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the jobsite, shall be installed without cold springing, 
and shall properly clear windows, doors, and other openings.  Cutting or other weakening of the building structure 
to facilitate piping installation will not be permitted.  Piping shall be free of burrs, oil, grease, and other 
foreign matter.  Piping shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction without damaging building 
structure, pipe, joints, or hangers.  Changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of 
pipe<MET> 100 mm</MET><ENG> 4 inches</ENG> and smaller will be permitted provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are formed.  
The centerline radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe.  Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, 
flattening, or other malformations will not be accepted.  Carbon steel piping to be bent shall conform to <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>
, Grade A, standard, or Grade B extra-heavy weight.  Vent pipes shall be carried through the roof and shall be 
properly flashed.  Unless otherwise indicated, horizontal supply mains shall pitch down in the direction of flow 
with a grade of not less than<MET> 25 mm in 12 m</MET><ENG> 1 inch in 40 feet</ENG>.  Open ends of pipelines and equipment shall be 
properly capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt or other foreign materials out of the systems.  Pipe 
not otherwise specified shall be uncoated.  Unless otherwise specified or shown, connections to equipment shall 
be made with malleable-iron unions for steel pipe<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG> or less in diameter and with flanges for 
pipe<MET> 80 mm</MET><ENG> 3 inches</ENG> or more in diameter.  Unions for copper pipe or tubing shall be brass or bronze.  Connections 
between ferrous piping and copper piping shall be electrically isolated from each other with dielectric couplings 
or other approved methods.  Reducing fittings shall be used for changes in pipe sizes.  In horizontal HTW lines, 
reducing fittings shall be eccentric type to maintain the top of the lines at the same level.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.5.1   Pipe Sleeves</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pipe passing through concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors or roofs shall be provided with pipe sleeves 
fitted into place at the time of construction.  A waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed as indicated.  
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members except where indicated or approved.  Rectangular and square 
openings shall be as detailed.  Each sleeve shall extend through its specified wall, floor, or roof, and shall 
be cut flush with each surface, except that sleeves through floors and roofs shall extend above the top surface 
at least<MET> 150 mm</MET><ENG> 6 inches</ENG>for proper flashing or finishing.  Membrane clamping rings shall be provided where membranes 
are penetrated.  Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be sized to provide a minimum clearance of<MET> 6 mm</MET><ENG> 1/4 
inch</ENG> between bare pipe and sleeves or between jacket over insulation and sleeves.  Sleeves in bearing walls, 
waterproofing membrane floors, and wet areas shall be galvanized steel pipe.  Sleeves in nonbearing walls, floors, 
or ceilings may be galvanized steel pipe or galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam.  Except 
in pipe chases or interior walls, the annular space between pipe and sleeve or between jacket over insulation 
and sleeve in nonfire rated walls, partitions, and floors shall be sealed as indicated and specified in Section 
<SRF>07 92 00</SRF> JOINT SEALANTS and in fire rated walls, partitions, and floors shall be sealed as indicated and specified 
in Section <SRF>07 84 00</SRF> FIRESTOPPING.  Metal jackets shall be provided over insulation passing through exterior walls, 
fire walls, fire partitions, floors, or roofs, shall not be thinner than<MET> 152.4 micrometers</MET><ENG> 0.006 inch</ENG> thick aluminum, 
if corrugated, and<MET> 0.4064 mm</MET><ENG> 0.0l6 inch</ENG> thick aluminum, if smooth, and shall be secured with aluminum or stainless 
steel bands not less than<MET> 10 mm</MET><ENG> 3/8 inch</ENG> wide and not more than<MET> 200 mm</MET><ENG> 8 inches</ENG> apart.  When penetrating roofs, 
before fitting the metal jacket into place, a<MET> 13 mm</MET><ENG> 1/2 inch</ENG> wide strip of sealant shall be run vertically along 
the inside of the longitudinal joint of the metal jacket from a point below the backup material to a minimum 
height of<MET> 900 mm</MET><ENG> 36 inches</ENG> above the roof.  If the pipe turns from vertical to horizontal, the sealant strip 
shall be run to a point just beyond the first elbow.  When penetrating waterproofing membrane for floors, the 
metal jacket shall extend from a point below the backup material to a minimum distance of<MET> 50 mm</MET><ENG> 2 inches</ENG> above 
the flashing.  For other areas, the metal jacket shall extend from a point below the backup material to a point<MET>
 300 mm</MET><ENG> 12 inches</ENG> above floor; or when passing through walls above grade, jacket shall extend at least<MET> 100 mm</MET><ENG>
 4 inches</ENG> beyond each side of the wall.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.5.1.1   Pipes Passing through Waterproofing Membranes</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Typical details of pipe sleeves through walls, floors, and roofs are 
shown in UFC 3-1905-01FA.  The applicable detail plates will be completed and 
included in the contract drawings.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>In addition to the pipe sleeves referred to above, pipes passing through roof or floor waterproofing membranes 
shall be provided with a<MET> 1.8 kg</MET><ENG> 4 pound</ENG> lead flashing or a<MET> 453 g</MET><ENG> 16 ounce</ENG> copper flashing, each within an integral 
skirt or flange.  Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than<MET> 200 mm</MET><ENG>
 8 inches</ENG> from the pipe and shall set over the roof or floor membrane in a troweled coating of bituminous cement.  
The flashing shall extend up the pipe a minimum of<MET> 250 mm</MET><ENG> 10 inches</ENG> above the roof or floor.  The annular space 
between the flashing and the bare pipe or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall 
be sealed as indicated.  Pipes up to and including<MET> 250 mm</MET><ENG> 10 inches</ENG> in diameter passing through roof or floor 
waterproofing membrane may be installed through a galvanized steel sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs, 
flashing clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts.  Waterproofing membrane shall be clamped into place 
and sealant shall be placed in the caulking recess.  In lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange and caulking 
and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve or conduit and sleeve, a modular mechanical-type sealing 
assembly may be installed.  The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously 
fill the annular space between the pipe/conduit and sleeve with corrosion protected carbon steel bolts, nuts, 
and pressure plates.  The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around 
the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut.  After the seal assembly is properly positioned 
in the sleeve, tightening of the bolts shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a water-tight 
seal between the pipe/conduit and the sleeve.  Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer 
to fit the pipe/conduit and sleeve involved.  The Contractor electing to use the modular mechanical-type seals 
shall provide sleeves of the proper diameters.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.5.1.2   Optional Counterflashing</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>As alternates to caulking and sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or metal-jacket-covered 
insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be accomplished by utilizing standard roof coupling for threaded 
pipe up to<MET> 150 mm</MET><ENG> 6 inches</ENG> in diameter; lead flashing sleeve for dry vents and turning the sleeve down into the 
pipe to form a waterproof joint; tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe and sealing as indicated.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>3.5.2   Pipe Joints</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Joints between sections of pipe and fittings shall be welded or flanged on all HTW piping.  On auxiliary piping, 
except as otherwise specified, fittings<MET> 25 mm</MET><ENG> 1 inch</ENG> and smaller shall be threaded; fittings<MET> 32 mm</MET><ENG> 1-1/4 inches</ENG>
 up to, but not including, <MET>65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG> may be either threaded or welded; and fittings<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG>
 and larger shall be either flanged or welded.  Pipe and fittings<MET> 32 mm</MET><ENG> 1-1/4 inches</ENG> and larger installed in 
inaccessible conduits or trenches beneath concrete floor slabs shall be welded.  Connections to equipment shall 
be made with black malleable-iron unions for pipe<MET> 50 mm</MET><ENG> 2 inches</ENG> or smaller in diameter, and with flanges for 
pipe<MET> 65 mm</MET><ENG> 2-1/2 inches</ENG> or larger in diameter.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.5.2.1   Threaded Joints</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Threaded joints shall be made with tapered threads properly cut and shall be made perfectly tight with a stiff 
mixture of graphite and oil, or polytetrafluoroethylene tape or equal, applied to the male threads only, and 
in no case to the fittings.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.5.2.2   Welded Joints</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Welded joints shall be fusion welded in accordance with <RID>ASME B31.1</RID>, unless otherwise required.  Changes in direction 
of piping shall be made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe to form elbows and tees or other 
similar type construction will not be acceptable.  Branch connections may be made with either welding tees or 
forged branch outlet fittings, either being acceptable without size limitation.  Branch outlet fittings, where 
used, shall be forged, flared for improvement flow where attached to the run, reinforced against external strains, 
and designed to withstand full pipe bursting strength.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Beveling:  Field and shop bevels shall be in accordance with the recognized standards and shall be 
done by mechanical means or flame cutting.  Where beveling is done by flame cutting, surfaces shall be 
cleaned of scale and oxidation before welding.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Alignment:  Before welding, the component parts to be welded shall be aligned so that no strain is 
placed on the weld when finally positioned.  Height shall be so aligned that no part of the pipe wall 
is offset by more than 20 percent of the wall thickness.  Flanges and branches shall be set true.  This 
alignment shall be preserved during the welding operation.  If tack welds are used, welds shall be of 
the same quality and made by the same procedure as the completed weld; otherwise, tack welds shall be 
removed during the final welding operation.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Erection:  Where the temperature of the component parts being welded reaches<MET> 0 degrees C</MET><ENG> 32 degrees 
F</ENG> or lower, the material shall be heated to approximately<MET> 38 degrees C</MET><ENG> 100 degrees F</ENG> for a distance of<MET>
 900 mm</MET><ENG> 3 feet</ENG> on each side of the weld before welding, and the weld shall be finished before the materials 
cool to<MET> 0 degrees C</MET><ENG> 32 degrees F</ENG>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>d.  Defective Welding:  Defective welds shall be removed and replaced.  Repairing of defective welds 
shall be in accordance with <RID>ASME B31.1</RID>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>e.  Electrodes:  After filler metal has been removed from its original package it shall be protected 
or stored so that its characteristics or welding properties are not affected.  Electrodes that have been 
wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.5.2.3   Flanges and Unions</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Flanges and unions shall be faced true, and made square and tight.  Gaskets shall be nonasbestos compressed material 
in accordance with <RID>ASME B16.21</RID>, <MET>1.6 mm</MET><ENG> 1/16 inch</ENG> thickness, full-face or self-centering flat ring type.  The 
gaskets shall contain aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) or nitrile butadiene rubber (NBR).  
NBR binder shall be used for hydrocarbon service.  Union or flange joints shall be provided in each line immediately 
preceding the connection to each piece of equipment or material requiring maintenance such as coils, pumps, control 
valves, and other similar items.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>3.5.3   Supports</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.5.3.1   General</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Mechanical and electrical layout drawings and specifications for ceiling 
suspensions should contain notes indicating that hanger loads between panel 
points in excess of 23 kg (50 pounds) shall have the excess hanger loads suspended 
from panel points.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Hangers used to support piping<MET> 50 mm</MET><ENG> 2 inches</ENG> and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after 
erection while still supporting the load.  Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate 
alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling, swaying, and undue strain.  Piping subjected 
to vertical movement, when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures, shall be supported by variable 
spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers.  [Pipe hanger loads suspended from steel joist between 
panel points shall not exceed<MET> 23 kg</MET><ENG> 50 pounds</ENG>.  Loads exceeding<MET> 23 kg</MET><ENG> 50 pounds</ENG> shall be suspended from panel 
points.]</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.5.3.2   Seismic Requirements</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Provide seismic requirements, if a Government designer (either Corps 
office or A/E) is the Engineer of Record, and show on the drawings.  Delete 
the bracketed phrase if seismic details are not provided.  Pertinent portions 
of UFC 3-310-04 and Sections <SRF>13 48 00</SRF> and <SRF>13 48 00.00 10</SRF>, properly edited, must 
be included in the contract documents.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic loads [as specified under UFC 3-310-04 
SEISMIC DESIGN FOR BUILDINGS and Sections <SRF>13 48 00</SRF> SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and 
<SRF>13 48 00.00 10</SRF> SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHNICAL EQUIPMENT] [as shown].  Structural steel required for reinforcement 
to properly support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided under this section.  Material 
used for supports shall be as specified under Section <SRF>05 12 00</SRF> STRUCTURAL STEEL.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.5.3.3   Structural Reinforcements</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Structural steel reinforcements required to support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided 
under this section.  Material and installation shall be as specified under Section <SRF>05 12 00</SRF> STRUCTURAL STEEL.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>3.5.4   Anchors</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Anchors shall be provided wherever necessary, or indicated, to localize expansion or prevent undue strain on 
piping.  Anchors shall consist of heavy steel collars with lugs and bolts for clamping and attaching anchor braces, 
unless otherwise indicated.  Anchor braces shall be installed in the most effective manner to secure the desired 
results, using turnbuckles where required.  Supports, anchors, or stays shall not be attached where they will 
injure the structure or adjacent construction during installation or by the weight of expansion of the pipeline.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.5.5   Pipe Expansion</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.5.5.1   Expansion Loop</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Wherever possible, provisions for expansion of supply-and-return pipes 
will be made by changes in the direction of the run of the pipe or by field 
fabricated expansion bends.  Where restrictions in space prevent such provisions 
for expansion, expansion joints will be installed and blank will filled as appropriate.  
Bracketed portion will be deleted if inapplicable.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Expansion loop shall provide adequate expansion of the main straight runs of the system within the stress limits 
specified in <RID>ASME B31.1</RID>.  The loop shall be cold sprung and installed where indicated.  Pipe guides shall be 
provided as indicated.  Except where otherwise indicated, expansion loops and bends shall be utilized to absorb 
and compensate for expansion and contraction instead of expansion joints.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.5.5.2   Expansion Joints</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  If expansion joints are required, this paragraph will be deleted.  Where 
restrictions in space prevent such provisions for expansion, expansion joints 
will be installed and blank will be filled as appropriate.  Bracketed portion 
will be deleted if inapplicable.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Expansion joints shall provide for either single or double slip of the connected pipes, as required and indicated, 
and for not less than the traverse indicated.  Anchor bases or support bases shall be provided as indicated or 
required.  Initial setting shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation to allow for an 
ambient temperature at time of installation.  Pipe alignment guides shall be installed as recommended by the 
joint manufacturer, but in any case shall not be more than<MET> 1.5 m</MET><ENG> 5 feet</ENG> from expansion joint, except that in 
lines<MET> 100 mm</MET><ENG> 4 inches</ENG> or smaller guides shall be installed not more than<MET> 600 mm</MET><ENG> 2 feet</ENG> from the joint.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>3.5.6   Valves</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Gate valves and globe valves shall be installed with the stem horizontal or above.  Swing check valves shall 
be installed in horizontal piping with the cap or bonnet up, or in vertical piping with the flow upward.  Lift 
or piston check valves shall always be installed in horizontal piping with the cap or bonnet up.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>3.6   BURIED PIPING INSTALLATION</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.6.1   Protective Coating for Underground Steel Pipe</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Steel pipe installed underground shall be given a protective covering, mechanically applied in a factory or field 
plant especially equipped for the purpose.  Specials and other fittings which cannot be coated and wrapped mechanically 
shall have the protective covering applied by hand, preferably at the plant applying the covering to the pipe.  
Coatings shall not be field applied until the piping has satisfactorily passed the leak or hydrostatic test.  
Field joints shall be coated and wrapped by hand.  Hand coating and wrapping shall be done in a manner and with 
materials that will produce a covering equal in effectiveness to that of the mechanically-applied covering.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.6.2   Cleaning of Surfaces to be Coated</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Steel surfaces shall be solvent-washed to assure an oil-and-grease-free surface, and blast-cleaned to bare metal 
as specified in <RID>SSPC SP 6</RID>.  Areas that cannot be cleaned by blasting shall be cleaned to bare metal by powered 
wire brushing or other mechanical means.  The air supply for blasting shall be free from oil and moisture.  Following 
cleaning, the surfaces shall be wiped with coal-tar solvent naphtha and allowed to dry.  The surfaces to be coated 
shall be free of all mill scale and foreign matter such as rust, dirt, grease, oil, and other deleterious substances.  
Surfaces shall be coated as soon as practicable after the cleaning operation.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.6.3   Coating Materials</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Buried steel piping shall be coated with one of the following methods:</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.6.3.1   Epoxy Coating System</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The epoxy coating system shall conform to the <RID>AWWA C213</RID>.  Fittings, valves, and joints shall be factory coated 
with materials identical to those used on the pipe, or may be field-coated with a 2-part epoxy system recommended 
by the manufacturer of the pipe coating system.  Field protection may also be provided for joints and fittings 
with a coal tar tape hot applied over a compatible primer.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.6.3.2   Bituminous Pipe Coating</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  If coating system similar to coal tar coating and wrapping is required 
using different materials, this paragraph shall be rewritten.  Where excessively 
corrosive soils are encountered, the piping shall be given a second coating 
of coal-tar enamel and a second wrapper of felt.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Bituminous protective system shall be a coal-tar enamel and primer coating system and shall consist of a coal-tar 
priming coat, a coal-tar enamel coat, a wrapper of coal tar saturated felt, and a wrapper of kraft paper, or 
a coat of water-resistant white-wash, applied in the order named and conforming to the requirements of <RID>AWWA C203</RID>
 in all respects as to materials, methods of application, tests, and handling, except that an interior lining 
shall not be applied.  Joints and fittings shall be coated and wrapped.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.6.3.3   Polyethylene Pipe Coating</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Continuous extruded polyethylene coating and adhesive undercoat application procedure, including surface preparation, 
shall be a factory-applied system conforming to <RID>NACE SP0185</RID>, Type A.  Joints, valves, flanges, and other irregular 
surfaces shall be tape-wrapped as outlined under the tape wrapping system, except that the tape shall be applied 
half-lapped, and all extruded polyethylene coating and adhesive undercoat surfaces to be tape-wrapped shall be 
primed with a compatible primer before application of tape.  The primer shall be as recommended by the tape manufacturer 
and approved by the applicator of the extruded polyethylene coating.  Damaged areas of extruded polyethylene 
coating shall be repaired by tape-wrapping as described under the tape-wrapping system, except that any residual 
material from the extruded polyethylene coating shall be pressed into the break or shall be trimmed off.  All 
areas to be taped shall be primed and the tape shall be applied half-lapped.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.6.3.4   Tape-Wrap Pipe Coating</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Cleaned surfaces shall be primed before applying tape as recommended by the manufacturer of the tape.  The tape 
shall be an approved, pressure-sensitive, organic plastic tape with a minimum nominal thickness of<MET> 0.51 mm</MET><ENG> 0.020 
inch</ENG>.  The tape shall conform to <RID>ASTM G 21</RID> for fungus resistance.  Tape shall be applied to clean, dry, grease-free, 
and dust-free surfaces only.  Weld beads shall be wire-brushed.  All burrs and weld spatter shall be removed.  
Weld beads shall be covered with one wrap of tape before spiral wrapping.  At each end of straight runs, a double 
wrap of one full width of tape shall be applied at right angles to the axis of the spiral wrapping.  Kraft paper 
protective wrapping, if any, shall be removed from the pipe before the tape is applied.  Material which is wrapped 
before it is placed in its final position shall have the wrapping protected at sling points with roofing felt 
or other approved heavy shielding material, or shall be handled with canvas slings.  Damaged wrapping shall be 
repaired as specified.  Pipe in straight runs shall be wrapped spirally, half-lapping the tape as it is applied.  
For pipe smaller than<MET> 100 mm</MET><ENG> 4 inches</ENG>, one layer half-lapped shall be used.  For pipe<MET> 100 mm</MET><ENG> 4 inches</ENG> and larger, 
two layers half-lapped shall be used with the second layer wrapped opposite-hand to the first.  Joints, coupling 
fittings, and similar units and damaged areas of wrapping shall be wrapped spirally beginning with one complete 
wrap<MET> 75 mm</MET><ENG> 3 inches</ENG> back from each edge of the corresponding size of straight pipe.  On irregular surfaces such 
as valves and other accessories, one layer half-lapped and stretched sufficiently to conform to the surface shall 
be applied, followed by a second layer half-lapped and applied with tension as it comes off the roll.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.6.3.5   Coating Inspection and Testing</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>After field coating of the pipe joints, the entire pipe shall be inspected with an electric holiday detector 
having an operating crest voltage of from 12,000 to 15,000 volts when using a full-ring, spring-type coil electrode.  
The holiday detector shall be equipped with a bell, buzzer, or other audible signal which operates when a holiday 
is detected.  Detected holidays in the protective covering shall be repaired.  Occasional checks of holiday detector 
potential will be made by the Contracting Officer to determine suitability of the detector.  The inspection for 
holidays shall be performed just before covering the pipe with backfill and every precaution shall be taken during 
backfill to prevent damage to the protective covering.  Equipment and labor necessary for inspection shall be 
furnished by the Contractor.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>3.6.4   Installing Buried Piping</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Pipe and accessories shall be handled carefully to assure a sound, undamaged condition.  Care shall be taken 
not to damage coating when lowering pipe into a trench and when backfilling.  Nonmetallic pipe shall be installed 
in accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions.  Underground pipelines shall be laid with a minimum pitch 
of<MET> 25 mm/15 m</MET><ENG> 1 inch/50 feet</ENG>.  Horizontal sections shall have a minimum coverage of<MET> 450 mm</MET><ENG> 18 inches</ENG>.  Piping 
shall be free of traps and shall drain toward tank.  The full length of each section of underground pipe shall 
rest solidly on the pipe bed.  Piping connections to equipment shall be as indicated, or as required, by the 
equipment manufacturer.  Tank connections shall be made with two elbow swing joints [or flexible connectors] 
to allow for differential settlement.  The interior of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter 
before being lowered into the trench and shall be kept clean during installation.  The pipe shall not be laid 
in water or when the trench or weather conditions are unsuitable.  When work is not in progress, open ends of 
pipe and fittings shall be securely closed so that water, earth, or other substances cannot enter the pipe or 
fittings.  Any pipe, fittings, or appurtenances found defective after installation shall be replaced.  Threaded 
joints shall be made with tapered threads and shall be made perfectly tight with joint compound applied to the 
male threads only.  This requirement shall not apply for the gauging hatch or similar connections directly over 
the tank where the line terminates in a fitting within a cast-iron manhole designed to allow for differential 
settling.  Where steel piping is to be anchored, the pipe shall be welded to the structural steel member of the 
anchor and the abraded area shall be patched with protective coating or covering as specified.  Piping passing 
through concrete or masonry construction shall be fitted with sleeves.  Each sleeve shall be of sufficient length 
to pass through the entire thickness of the associated structural member and shall be large enough to provide 
a minimum clear distance of<MET> 13 mm</MET><ENG> 1/2 inch</ENG> between the pipe and sleeve, except where otherwise indicated.  Sleeves 
through concrete may be<MET> 0.912 mm (20 gauge)</MET><ENG> 20 gauge</ENG> metal, fiber, or other approved material.  Sleeves shall 
be accurately located on center with the piping and shall be securely fastened in place.  The space between the 
sleeves and the pipe shall be caulked and filled with bituminous plastic cement or mechanical caulking units 
designed for such use.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>3.7   FIELD PAINTING AND COATING</TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Where identification of piping is required by the using service, this 
paragraph will be amplified to include appropriate requirements either directly 
or by reference to a separate section.  Air Force requirements are covered in 
AFM 88-15.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Except as otherwise specified, ferrous metal shall be cleaned, prepared, and painted as specified in Section 
<SRF>09 90 00</SRF> PAINTS AND COATINGS.  Buried steel shall be given a protective coating as specified.  Exposed pipe covering 
shall be painted as specified in Section <SRF>09 90 00</SRF> PAINTS AND COATINGS.  Aluminum sheath over insulation shall 
not be painted.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.8   MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.8.1   Manufacturer's Representative</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Services of a manufacturer's representative who is experienced in the installation, adjustment, and operation 
of the equipment specified shall be provided.  The representative shall supervise the installing, adjusting, 
and testing of the equipment.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.8.2   <SUB>Field Training</SUB></TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>A field training course shall be provided for designated operating staff members.  Training shall be provided 
for a total period of [_____] hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally complete, 
but prior to final acceptance tests.  Field training shall cover all of the items contained in the approved <SUB>operating 
and maintenance instructions</SUB>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>3.9   <SUB>TESTS</SUB></TTL><BRK/>
<NTE><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/>
<NPR>NOTE:  Before occupancy of a facility the boilers shall be inspected in accordance 
with the Code of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (BPVI) and the American 
Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).  Inspectors must be certified in accordance 
with BPVI standards.</NPR><BRK/>
<AST/><BRK/></NTE>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The Contractor shall submit the proposed performance test procedure for required tests, 30 days prior to the 
proposed test date, containing a complete description of the proposed test, along with calibration curves or 
test results furnished by an independent testing laboratory of each instrument, meter, gauge, and thermometer 
to be used in the tests.  The test shall not commence until the procedure has been approved.  The Contractor's 
complete plan for water treatment, including proposed chemicals to be used and nationally recognized testing 
codes applicable to the system, shall be submitted prior to system startup.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.9.1   <TST>Hydrostatic Tests</TST></TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Following erection, each HTW generator shall be tested hydrostatically and proved tight under a gauge pressure 
of 1.5 times the specified working pressure.  Following the installation of all piping and boiler house equipment, 
but before the application of any insulation, hydrostatic tests shall be made and the system proved tight under 
gauge pressures of 1.5 times the specified working pressure.  Tests shall be made under the direction of, and 
subject to, the approval of the Contracting Officer.  The Contractor shall adjust all equipment and controls 
before the scheduled operational test.  A testing schedule shall be submitted at least 15 days before scheduled 
test.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.9.1.1   <TST>Water Sides Including Fittings and Accessories</TST></TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Water sides shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with the requirements of <RID>ASME BPVC SEC I</RID> and <RID>ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1</RID>
 as applicable.  The ASME stamp will be accepted as evidence of this test.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.9.1.2   <TST>Generator Casing, Air Casings, and Ducts</TST></TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Air casing and ducts exterior to the generators shall be tested pneumatically at the maximum working pressure.  
The soap bubble or smoke bomb method shall be used to verify tightness.  Gas sides of the generators normally 
operated under pressure shall be tested for tightness at 1-1/2 times the predicted operating pressure in the 
furnace at maximum predicted output.  For this test the generator shall be tightly sealed with a suitable means 
to blank off all openings.  Air shall be admitted to the generator until the test pressure is reached and then 
shall be held.  If in a 10-minute period the pressure drop does not exceed<MET> 1.2 kPa</MET><ENG> 5 inches water gauge</ENG>, the 
casing shall be regarded as tight and accepted.  Air pressure and smoke bomb or comparative CO(2) readings shall 
be used for induced draft generators.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.9.1.3   <TST>Fuel Oil Test</TST></TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>After the system has been flushed and operationally tested, the underground portion of the system shall be leak 
tested in accordance with Section <SRF>33 56 10</SRF> FACTORY-FABRICATED FUEL STORAGE TANKS.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.9.1.4   <TST>Fuel Systems for Oil-Fired HTW Generators</TST></TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The part of the preassembled fuel oil system that is furnished integrally with the generator shall be tested 
hydrostatically at 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure.  The part of the preassembled gas system that is 
furnished integrally with the generator shall be tested pneumatically at operating pressure.  The soap bubble 
test method shall be used to verify tightness of the gas system.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>3.9.2   <TST>Fire Safety for Oil-Fired HTW Generators</TST></TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Test shall be conducted as necessary to determine compliance with the applicable UL safety standards.  The presence 
of the UL label may be accepted as evidence of compliance in this respect.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.9.2.1   <TST>Oil-Fired Generators</TST></TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Oil-fired generators shall meet the test requirements of <RID>UL 726</RID>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.9.2.2   <TST>Oil Burners</TST></TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Oil burners shall meet the test requirements of <RID>UL 296</RID>.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>3.9.3   <TST>Capacity and Efficiency Tests</TST></TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The capacity and efficiency at the specified capacity of the generator shall be determined in accordance with 
the <RID>ASME PTC 4</RID> for steam generating units.  The efficiency shall be determined by the direct input-output method 
and shall be checked with the loss method computation.  Test runs shall be made at the maximum capacity for 4 
hours; at the minimum capacity and at 50 percent capacity for 2 hours each, respectively.  Test reports and performance 
curves shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer.  Before any operational tests are conducted, the system 
shall be correctly balanced within 5 percent of that indicated.  Corrections and adjustments shall be made as 
necessary to produce the required conditions.  Approved methods shall be used to measure all rates of flow.  
The efficiency and general performance tests on the boilers shall be conducted by a qualified test engineer furnished 
by the Contractor, and observed by a representative of the Contracting Officer.  Testing apparatus shall be set 
up, calibrated, tested, and readied for testing the boiler before the arrival of the representative of the Contracting 
Officer.  Calibration curves or test results furnished by an independent testing laboratory for each instrument, 
meter, gauge, and thermometer to be used in efficiency and capacity test shall be furnished before the test.  
A test report including logs, heat balance calculations, and tabulated results together with conclusions shall 
be delivered in quadruplicate.  An analysis of the fuel being burned on the test shall be submitted to the Contracting 
Officer.  The analysis shall include all pertinent data tabulated in the <RID>ASME PTC 4</RID> abbreviated efficiency test.  
The Contractor shall provide and install all necessary temporary piping valves, controls, heat exchanger, and 
cooling water provisions to provide a load for testing each HTW generator.  If any system load is available, 
the Contracting Officer will provide for loading the heating system for the test, but full-load capability will 
probably require a supplementary heat exchanger for the test.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.9.4   <TST>Operating Tests</TST></TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>After adjustment and achievement of stable operation of the HTW generators, each shall be tested continuously 
for 12 hours, minimum, to demonstrate control and operational conformance to the requirements of this specification 
under varying load conditions ranging from the specified capacity to the minimum burner or stoker turndown ratio 
without on-off cycling.  In each case, the operating tests shall cover the periods for the capacities tabulated 
below:</TXT><BRK/>
<TBL><THD><BRK/>
<HL4>Waterwall Watertube Boilers</HL4><BRK/>
<BRK/>
                  Time (minimum)                Percent of Capacity<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
                   First 2 hours                         50<BRK/>
                   Next 2 hours                          75<BRK/>
                   Next 6 hours*                        100<BRK/>
                   Next 2 hours                         110<BRK/></TBL>
<BRK/>
<TXT>* The efficiency tests may be conducted either concurrently with the operating tests or separately at the option 
of the Contractor.  Efficiency shall be not less than that specified.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.9.5   Test of Fuel Burning Equipment</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Automatic oil burners shall also be tested for capability to provide high temperature water in accordance with 
demand when on-off cycling is required.  Fuel burning equipment that exhibits excessive or unexplained loss of 
ignition, nuisance shutdown due to faulty burner, stoker, or control operation, improper flame, excessive carbon 
deposits or slag, or necessity for difficult or frequent adjustments shall be rejected.  Operational tests shall 
include the following as applicable to the type of HTW generator.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.9.5.1   Sequencing</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The HTW generator shall [start,] operate, and stop in accordance with the specified operating sequence.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.9.5.2   Flame Safeguard</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The operation of the flame safeguard control on oil- or gas-fired generators shall be verified by simulated flame 
and ignition failures.  Burners having continuous or intermittent pilots shall be tested by simulating main flame 
failure while the pilot is burning.  The trial-for-pilot ignition, trial-for-main-flame ignition, combustion 
control reaction, and valve closing times shall be verified by stop watch.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Immunity to Hot Refractory:  The burner shall be operated at high fire until the combustion chamber 
refractory reaches maximum temperature.  The main fuel valve shall then be closed manually.  The combustion 
safeguard shall drop out immediately causing the safety shutoff valves to close within the specified 
control reaction and valve closing times.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Pilot Intensity Required:  The fuel supply to the pilot flame shall be gradually reduced to the point 
where the combustion safeguard begins to drop out (sense "no flame") but holds in until the main fuel 
valve opens.  At this point of reduced pilot fuel supply, the pilot flame shall be capable of safely 
igniting the main burner.  If the main fuel valve can be opened on a pilot flame of insufficient intensity 
to safely light the main flame, the generator shall be rejected.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>c.  Turndown Ratio:  The specified turndown ratio shall be verified by firing at the minimum firing rate.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>d.  HTW Generator Limit and Fuel Safety Interlocks:  Safety shutdown shall be caused by simulating interlock 
actuating conditions for each generator limit and fuel and safety interlock.  Safety shutdowns shall 
occur in the specified manner.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>e.  Combustion Controls:  The accuracy range and smoothness of operation of the combustion controls shall 
be demonstrated by varying the demand throughout the entire firing range required by the turndown ratio 
specified for the [burner] [and] [stoker] and in the case of automatic sequenced burners by further varying 
the firing rate to require on-off cycling.  The control accuracy shall be as specified.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>f.  Safety Valves:  Safety valves on HTW generators shall not be tested under operating conditions.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>g.  Blowdown Valves and Try Cocks:  Blowdown valves and try cocks shall be tested for proper operation.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>h.  Fans, Heaters, Pumps, and Motors:  Draft fans, fuel oil heaters, fuel pumps, and electric motors 
shall be tested when necessary to determine compliance with the referenced standards.  The operation 
of fans, [fuel oil heaters] [stokers] [fuel pumps] and electric motors shall be closely observed for 
possible defects or nonconformance.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>3.9.6   Test of Water Treatment Equipment</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Test of water treatment equipment shall meet the requirements specified for capacity and quality of effluent.  
Tests for ion-exchange units shall cover at least two complete regenerations and capacity runs.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.9.7   System Balancing</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>During operating tests, the preliminary system balancing results shall be observed and flow rates logged.  Where 
an auxiliary heat exchanger is not required for the test load, final system balancing shall be accomplished during 
the operating test.  Where the auxiliary heat exchanger is required, sufficient temporary piping shall be provided 
to shunt the water flow through the various system control valves to allow an approximate flow balance of the 
system.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>3.10   CLEANING OF HTW GENERATORS AND PIPING</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<SPT><TTL>3.10.1   HTW Generator Cleaning</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>After the hydrostatic tests have been made, and before performance of the operating tests, the boilers shall 
be thoroughly and effectively cleaned of foreign materials.  Wherever possible, surfaces in contact with water 
shall be wire brushed to remove loose material.  The Contractor may use the following procedure or may submit 
his own standard procedure for review and approval by the Contracting Officer.  HTW generators shall be filled 
with a solution consisting of the following proportional ingredients for every<MET> 3785 L</MET><ENG> 1000 gallons</ENG> of water, 
and operated at approximately<MET> 210 to 345 kPa</MET><ENG> 30 to 50 psig</ENG> for a period of 24 to 48 hours:</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>a.  Use<MET> 11 kg caustic soda</MET><ENG> 24 lb. caustic soda</ENG>; <MET>3.6 kg sodium nitrate</MET><ENG> 8 lb. sodium nitrate</ENG>; <MET>11 kg disodium 
phosphate, anhydrous</MET><ENG> 24 lb. disodium phosphate, anhydrous</ENG>; and<MET> 230 g approved wetting agent</MET><ENG> 1/2 lb. approved 
wetting agent</ENG>.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<LST>b.  Chemicals in the above proportions, or as otherwise approved, shall be thoroughly dissolved in the 
water before being placed in the HTW generator.  After the specified boiling period, the boilers shall 
be allowed to cool, and then drained and thoroughly flushed.  Piping shall be cleaned by operating the 
HTW generators for a period of approximately 48 hours.</LST><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
<SPT><TTL>3.10.2   HTW Generator Water Conditioning</TTL><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>The Contractor shall provide HTW generator water conditioning including chemicals, chemical treatment, and blowdown 
during periods of boiler operation to prevent scale and corrosion in HTW generators and in supply and return 
distribution systems from the initial startup of the system, through the testing period, and to final acceptance 
of the completed work, but for at least 30 days of operation.  Approved chemicals and method of treatment shall 
be used.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</SPT><SPT><TTL>3.11   SCHEDULES</TTL><BRK/>
<MET><TBL><THD><BRK/>
<HL4>TABLE I.  PIPE</HL4><BRK/>
<BRK/>
Service          Pressure     Material          Specification        Type<BRK/>
kPa<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
Boiler feed,      0-4150    Black steel (2)    <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
drain lines,                                                         Grade A<BRK/>
&amp; HTW lines<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Feedwater piping   0-860    Std. wt. black     <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                            steel                                    Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Cold water piping  0-860    Std. wt.           <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                            zinc-coated                              Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Water column (1)   0-4150   Std. wt. black     <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                            steel                                    Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Vent and exhaust   0-175    Std. wt. black     <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                            pipe steel                               Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Compressed air     0-860    Std. wt. black     <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                            steel                                    Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Gauge piping       0-175    Copper tubing      <RID>ASTM B 88</RID>,<BRK/>
<RID>ASTM B 88M</RID> Type K                                or L<BRK/>
<BRK/>
                    0-4150   Black steel (2)    <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                                                                     Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Fuel oil (Nos. 4,  0-1050   Std. wt. black     <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
5, &amp; 6)                     steel                                    Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Control air        0-1050   Copper tubing      <MET><RID>ASTM B 68M</RID></MET><ENG><RID>ASTM B 68</RID></ENG>  [_____]<BRK/>
                            Std. wt. black     <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                            steel                                    Grade A<BRK/></TBL>
</MET><ENG><TBL><THD><BRK/>
<HL4>TABLE I.  PIPE</HL4><BRK/>
<BRK/>
Service           Pressure    Material        Specification      Type<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
Boiler feed,        0-600   Black steel (2)    <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
drain lines,                                                         Grade A<BRK/>
&amp; HTW lines<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Feedwater piping    0-125   Std. wt. black     <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                            steel                                    Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Cold water piping   0-125   Std. wt.           <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                            zinc-coated                              Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Water column (1)    0-600   Std. wt. black     <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                            steel                                    Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Vent and exhaust    0-25    Std. wt. black     <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                            pipe steel                               Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Compressed air      0-125   Std. wt. black     <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                            steel                                    Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Gauge piping        0-25    Copper tubing      <RID>ASTM B 88</RID>,<BRK/>
<RID>ASTM B 88M</RID> Type K                                or L<BRK/>
<BRK/>
                    0-600   Black steel (2)    <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                                                                     Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Fuel oil (Nos. 4,   0-150   Std. wt. black     <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
5, &amp; 6)                     steel                                    Grade A<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Control air         0-150   Copper tubing      <MET><RID>ASTM B 68M</RID></MET><ENG><RID>ASTM B 68</RID></ENG>  [_____]<BRK/>
                            Std. wt. black     <RID>ASTM A 53/A 53M</RID>  Type E<BRK/>
                            steel                                    Grade A<BRK/></TBL>
</ENG><BRK/>
<TXT>Note 1:  No bending of pipe will be permitted.  Crosses with pipe plugs at connection shall be provided.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Note 2:  Extra Strong (XS) minimum weight.  Conform to <RID>ASME B31.1</RID> for wall thickness.</TXT><BRK/>
<MET><TBL><THD><BRK/>
<HL4>TABLE II.  FITTINGS</HL4><BRK/>
<BRK/>
Service        Size          Title        Materials      Specification<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
Vent pipe      Under        Threaded      Malleable-iron  <RID>ASME B16.3</RID><BRK/>
               80 mm        Buttwelded    Steel           <RID>ASME B16.9</RID><BRK/>
               80 mm &amp;<BRK/>
               larger<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Compressed     Under        Threaded      Zinc-coated     <RID>ASME B16.3</RID><BRK/>
air            80 mm                      malleable-iron<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Exhaust pipe   Under        Threaded      Zinc-coated     <RID>ASME B16.3</RID><BRK/>
               80 mm                      malleable-iron<BRK/>
               80 mm &amp;      Buttwelded    Steel           <RID>ASME B16.9</RID><BRK/>
               larger<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Boiler         Under        Threaded      Malleable-iron  <RID>ASME B16.3</RID><BRK/>
feed (1)       80 mm        Buttwelded    Steel           <RID>ASME B16.9</RID><BRK/>
               80 mm &amp;<BRK/>
               larger<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Feedwater      Under        Threaded      Malleable-iron  <RID>ASME B16.3</RID><BRK/>
pipe           80 mm        Buttwelded    Steel           <RID>ASME B16.9</RID><BRK/>
               80 mm &amp;<BRK/>
               larger<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Drain lines    All          Buttwelded    Steel           <RID>ASME B16.9</RID><BRK/>
(1) &amp; HTW                   Socket        Steel           <RID>ASME B16.11</RID><BRK/>
lines                       welded<BRK/>
                            Flanged with  Steel           <RID>ASME B16.5</RID><BRK/>
                            long radius<BRK/>
                            elbows<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Water column   Under        Threaded      Malleable-iron  <RID>ASME B16.3</RID><BRK/>
piping (1)     80 mm<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Gauge pipe     All          Flared or     Cast or wrought <RID>ASME B16.18</RID><BRK/>
                            soldered      bronze          <RID>ASME B16.26</RID><BRK/></TBL>
</MET><ENG><TBL><THD><BRK/>
<HL4>TABLE II.  FITTINGS</HL4><BRK/>
<BRK/>
Service        Size          Title        Materials      Specification<BRK/></THD>
<BRK/>
Vent pipe      Under        Threaded      Malleable-iron  <RID>ASME B16.3</RID><BRK/>
               3-inches     Buttwelded    Steel           <RID>ASME B16.9</RID><BRK/>
               3-inches &amp;<BRK/>
               larger<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Compressed     Under        Threaded      Zinc-coated     <RID>ASME B16.3</RID><BRK/>
air            3-inches                   malleable-iron<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Exhaust pipe   Under        Threaded      Zinc-coated     <RID>ASME B16.3</RID><BRK/>
               3-inches                   malleable-iron<BRK/>
               3-inches &amp;   Buttwelded    Steel           <RID>ASME B16.9</RID><BRK/>
               larger<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Boiler         Under        Threaded      Malleable-iron  <RID>ASME B16.3</RID><BRK/>
feed (1)       3-inches     Buttwelded    Steel           <RID>ASME B16.9</RID><BRK/>
               3-inches &amp;<BRK/>
               larger<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Feedwater      Under        Threaded      Malleable-iron  <RID>ASME B16.3</RID><BRK/>
pipe           3-inches     Buttwelded    Steel           <RID>ASME B16.9</RID><BRK/>
               3-inches &amp;<BRK/>
               larger<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Drain lines    All          Buttwelded    Steel           <RID>ASME B16.9</RID><BRK/>
(1) &amp; HTW                   Socket        Steel           <RID>ASME B16.11</RID><BRK/>
lines                       welded<BRK/>
                            Flanged with  Steel           <RID>ASME B16.5</RID><BRK/>
                            long radius<BRK/>
                            elbows<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Water column   Under        Threaded      Malleable-iron  <RID>ASME B16.3</RID><BRK/>
piping (1)     3-inches<BRK/>
<BRK/>
Gauge pipe     All          Flared or     Cast or wrought <RID>ASME B16.18</RID><BRK/>
                            soldered      bronze          <RID>ASME B16.26</RID><BRK/></TBL>
</ENG><BRK/>
<TXT>Note 1:  Conform to <RID>ASME B31.1</RID> for wall thickness except minimum shall be extra strong pipe.  Match piping requirements.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/>
<TXT>Note 2:  Fuel oil piping and fittings shall comply with Section <SRF>33 56 10</SRF> FACTORY-FABRICATED FUEL STORAGE TANKS.</TXT><BRK/>
<BRK/></SPT>
</PRT>    <END/><BRK/></SEC>